‫الجزء الثاني‬

‫‪Volume 2‬‬
Copyright © 2017 by Guidance Publications

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, distributed, or transmit-
ted in any form or by any means, including photocopying, recording, or other electronic
or mechanical methods, without the prior written permission of the publisher, except in
the case of brief quotations embodied in critical reviews and certain other noncommercial
uses permitted by Canadian copyright law.

Printed in Canada
First Edition | January 2017

ISBN 978-1-7751948-1-1

For permission requests, contact the publisher at the email below.

guidancepublications@ihsan.ca
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION – ‫ ُم َق َّد َمة‬...................................................................................................................... 7
PREFACE ........................................................................................................................................ 9
ESSENTIAL VOCABULARY – ‫ م ْص َط َل َحات ها ّمة‬............................................................................................ 12
CLASSIFYING WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR ROOT LETTERS ............................................................ 13
RULES OF MITHĀL – ‫ الْ ِمثَال‬................................................................................................................ 16
EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL – ‫) الْ َو ْع ُد ( الْ ِمثَال‬............................................................................................... 18
RULES OF ÀJWAF – ‫ ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬............................................................................................................... 24
FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF – ‫) ال َق ْو ُل ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬.................................................................................... 28
SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF – ‫ ) الْ َب ْي ُع ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬................................................................................ 33
THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF – ‫ ) الْخَ ْوفُ ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬................................................................................. 38
RULES OF NĀQIṢ – ‫ النَّاقِص‬................................................................................................................. 44
FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫) ال َّد ْع َو ُة ( النَّاقِص‬...................................................................................... 48
SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫ ) ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن ( النَّاقِص‬................................................................................ 53
THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫ ) ال َّر ْم ُي ( ال َّناقِص‬...................................................................................... 58
RULES OF LAFĪF – ‫ اللَّ ِفيف‬.................................................................................................................. 64
EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ – ‫ ) الْ ِوقَا َي ُة ( اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق‬.......................................................................... 66
EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN – ‫ ) الْ ُق َّو ُة ( اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون‬............................................................................ 72
IMPORTANT FACTS FOR LEARNING MUDĀ’AF – ‫ ُم َضا َعف‬........................................................................ 78
RULES OF ÌDGHĀM – ‫ ا ْل ِأ ْدغَام‬.............................................................................................................. 80
EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF – ‫ ) ال َّذب ( الْ ُم َضا َعف‬........................................................................................ 82
RULES OF MAHMŪZ – ‫ الْ َم ْه ُموز‬............................................................................................................ 88
EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ – ‫ ) الس َؤا ُل َو الْ َم ْس َئ َل ُة ( الْ َم ْه ُموز‬................................................................................ 90
MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT – ‫ َت ْعلِيلَات ُم َت َف ِّرقَة‬............................................................................................ 96
CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM ACCORDING TO ITS ORIGIN – ‫ اَ ْق َسام ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬.................................................. 100
JĀMID ‫ الْ َجا ِمد‬.............................................................................................................................. 100
MAṢDAR ‫ الْ َم ْصدَر‬......................................................................................................................... 103
MUSHTAQ ‫ الْ ُمشْ َتق‬........................................................................................................................ 105

4
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ TRANSLITERATION TABLE

TRANSLITERATION TABLE
Consonants:
b = ‫ب‬ ḥ = ‫ح‬ r = ‫ر‬ ṣ = ‫ص‬ ’ = ‫ع‬ k = ‫ك‬ ̀ = ‫ء‬
t = ‫ت‬ kh = ‫خ‬ z = ‫ز‬ d = ‫ض‬ gh = ‫غ‬ l = ‫ل‬ h = ‫ھ‬
th = ‫ث‬ d = ‫د‬ s = ‫س‬ ṭ = ‫ط‬ f = ‫ف‬ m = ‫م‬ w = ‫و‬
j = ‫ج‬ dh = ‫ذ‬ sh = ‫ش‬ ẓ = ‫ظ‬ q = ‫ق‬ n = ‫ن‬ y = ‫ي‬
Vowels:
a = ََ i = َِ u = َُ
ā = ‫ا‬ ī = ‫ي‬ ū = ‫و‬
‫ء‬ A distinctive glottal stop made at the bottom of the throat

‫ث‬ Pronounced like the ‘th’ in think

‫ح‬ Hard ‘h’ sound made at the Adam’s apple in the middle of the throat

‫خ‬ Pronounced like the ‘ch’ in the Scottish ‘Loch’

‫ذ‬ Pronounced like the ‘th’ in this

‫ر‬ A slightly rolled ‘r’ made behind the front teeth which is not rolled more than once or twice

‫ص‬ An emphatic ‘s’ pronounced behind the upper front teeth

‫ض‬ An emphatic d-like sound made by pressing the entire tongue against the upper palate

‫ط‬ An emphatic ‘t’ sound produced behind the front teeth

‫ظ‬ An emphatic ‘th’ sound, like the ‘th’ in this made behind the front teeth

‫ع‬ A distinctive Semitic sound made in the middle throat

‫غ‬ A guttural sound made at the top of the throat resembling the untrilled French ‘r’

‫ق‬ A sound produced by raising the back end of the tongue and touching the soft palate

‫ه‬ Like the English ‘h’ but has more body. It is made at the very bottom of the throat.

5
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬

‫بِ ْس ِم الل ِه ال َّر ْحم ِن ال َّر ِحيم‬

‫‪6‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫‪INTRODUCTION‬‬ ‫ُم َق َّد َمة –‬

‫ُم َق َّد َمة – ‪INTRODUCTION‬‬

‫يب ا ْلأَيَّا ِم َو اللَّ ْي ِال‪.‬‬ ‫وال‪َ ،‬و ت َْس ِدي ُد ا ْلأفْ َع ِال‪َ ،‬و َت ْق ِل ُ‬ ‫الْ َح ْم ُد لِل ّ ِه الْمتص ّرف ِذ ْي الْ َجل ِ‬
‫َال‪ ،‬الْ َك ِب ْي ِر الْف َّع ِال ‪ ،‬الَّ ِذي بِ َي ِد ِه ت َْصر ُ‬
‫ِيف ا ْلأ َ ْح ِ‬
‫اَ ْح َم ُد ُه َت َعالَى َو ُه َو شَ ِدي ُد الْ ِم َح ِال‪َ ،‬واُ ْث ِني عليه و ُه َو َح ِمي ُد الْ ِف َعال‪َ ،‬و اَ ْش ُك ُر ُه َع َلى نِ َع ِم ِه َو ُه َو الْ ُم ْن ِع ُم الْ ِم ْف َضا ُل‪َ ،‬و اَ ْس َت ْه ِدي ُه َو‬
‫ات‬‫الح ا ْلأ َ ْع َم ِال َو اَ َت َوكَّ ُل َع َل ْي ِه ِفي التَّ َحلِّي بِ َج ِميلِ الْ ِخ َص ِال‪َ ،‬و اَ ُعو ُذ بِاللَّ ِه ِم ْن شَ ِّر نَ ْف ِسي َو ِم ْن َس ِّي َئ ِ‬ ‫ُه َو الْ َها ِدي اِلَى َص ِ‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْع َمال‪َ .‬و اَ ْش َه ُد اَ ْن لأ َ اِلَ َه اِ َّلأ اَللَّ ُه ُو ْح َد ُه َلأ شَ رِيكَ لَ ُه‪ ،‬شهاد ًة كَا ِفلَ ًة بِ َتص ِر ْي ِف قُلُ ْوبِ َنا ا َِلي َطا َع ِت ِه خَ ْي َر ت َْص ِر ْي ٍف‪ ،‬و ال َّتاْلِ ْي ِف َب ْي َن‬
‫ف و ِْج َه َة الْخَ ْلقِ اِلَي ال َّر ِّب الْخَ ِب ْي ِر اللَّ ِط ْي ِف‪،‬‬ ‫قُلُ ْو ِب اَهْلِ ِالأ ْي َم ِان خَ ْي َر تَاْلِ ْي ٍف َو اَ ْش َه ُد اَ َّن ُم َح َّمداً َع ْب ُد ُه َو َر ُسولُ ُه‪ ،‬ال ّ ِذ ْي َص َر َ‬
‫ِف ﷲُ بِ َها َع َّنا كُ َّل ُس ْو ٍء َو يُ َث ِّب َت َنا بِ َها‬ ‫َصلَّى اللَّ ُه ت ََبا َرك َو َت َعالَى َع َلي ِه َو َعلَى الِ ِه َو اَ ْص َحابِ ِه َو ُع َل َما ِء اُ َّمتِ ِه َو َط َل َب ِت ِه ْم صلو ًة َي ْصر ُ‬
‫َع َلي ال ِّد ْينِ الْ َحنِ ْي ِف‪.‬‬

‫اَ َّما َبعد‪:‬فان فهم مراد اﷲ و رسوله في القران الحكيم و السنّة المط ّهرة امر مطلوب في دين الأسلام‪ ،‬يتطلّع له ك ّل قلب مؤمن‬
‫بحب ﷲ و رسوله‪ .‬و من المعلوم الواضح انه لأ سبيل الي معرفة كلام ﷲ و رسوله الّأ بتعلّم لسان العرب الأُول‬ ‫مشغوف ّ‬
‫الذين نزل بلسانهم الكتاب و نطق به السنّة‪ .‬و قد اعتني بهذا اللسان الشريف خل ٌق لأ يحصي عددهم من العلماء والطلبة‬
‫السلك المبارك الطيب‪ ،‬علي ضعفنا و‬ ‫تعلّ ًما و تعلي ًما‪ ،‬و ضب ًطا و تصنيفًا‪ ،‬في كل عصر و زمان‪ .‬و يس ّرنا ان ن ْنخرط في هذا ِّ‬
‫عجزنا و قلة بضاعتنا بهذه اللغة الشريفة‪ ،‬وﷲ ولّي التوفيق‪.‬‬

‫قد تحقّق بالتجارب عند ارباب التعليم و اهل الأعتناء بشؤونه ان تعليم مبادئ ا ّي ما ّدة في لغة الطالب "الأم" من انفع طرق‬
‫التحصيل و الأفادة‪ .‬و هذا يظهر في اوضح الأشكال في تعليم اللغات‪ .‬بيد انه لأ ب ّد من توفير بيئة تساعد الطالب علي الفهم‬
‫حث الطلبة علي النطق‬ ‫الصحيح‪ ،‬و ذلك يكون بالأكثار من استخدام كلمات تلك اللغة‪ ،‬و اعطاء الأمثلة و التمرينات‪ ،‬مع ّ‬
‫باللغة‪ ،‬كي يصح فهمهم و استعمالهم لها‪ .‬وهكذا حال اللغة العربية; ان المعلّم الحكيم الشفوق اذا د ّرب الطلبة علي حفظ‬
‫القواعد و المصطلحات و تطبيقها بالتمرين الكتابي و الشفوي‪ ،‬و الفهم بكلمات اللغة العربية و حثّهم علي استعمالها خلال‬
‫الدرس و خارجه‪ ،‬فلعلّه ينجح بانشاء الفهم الصحيح فيهم‪ .‬و عسي ان يتمتّع الطالب الّذي توفّر لديه هذه الأسباب‪ ،‬فيعيش‬
‫مع اللغة تعاملا ً و نطقاً‪ ،‬و حفظاً و كتابة‪ ،‬بمعرفة جيدّة للّغة و ملكة راسخة في القراءة و الكتابة و الأنشاء‪ .‬و ا ّما من اكتفي‬
‫بشرح القواعد باللغة المشتركة بين الطالب و المد ّرس‪ ،‬و لم يلتزم منهج التطبيق و التمرين العملي‪ ،‬او لم يك ّون 'بيئة اللغة'‬
‫للطالب خلال الدرس‪ ،‬فقد يخرج الطالب من عنده‪ ،‬و ليس عنده الّأ عدّة قواعد لغوية لأ يدري ما يفعل بها‪ ،‬و لأ اين‬
‫يضعها‪ ،‬و هذه من المشاكل التي نشاهدها و نعانيها في حقل تعليم اللغة العربية لغير الناطقين بها‪ ،‬وﷲ المستعان‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫‪INTRODUCTION‬‬ ‫ُم َق َّد َمة –‬
‫و الواقع في البلاد الغربية و غيرها من البلاد ان ُج ّل طلبة العلوم العربية‪ -‬كمعظم الناشئة الجديدة فيها‪ -‬ناطقون باللغة‬
‫الأنجليزية التي صارت كلغة عالمية في هذا الزمان‪ .‬فهي لغتهم الأولي‪ ،‬الّتي يع ّولون عليها في الكلام و الحوار‪ ،‬و الكتابة و‬
‫القراءة‪ ،‬الي ح ّد ان كثيرا منهم لأ يقدرون علي التعبير الصحيح في لغة والديهم الذين هاجروا الي الغرب من شتّي البقاع –‬
‫عرباً كانوا او عج ًما‪.-‬و لأ غرو فيه‪ ،‬فان الأنسان رهين بيئته‪ ...‬فل ّما اشتدّت حاجة الطلبة الناطقين بالأنجليزية الي كتب‬
‫تساعدهم في تعلّم لغة القران و الحديث‪ ،‬راينا ان نضع لهم سلسل ًة في العلوم العربية تسهيلًا لهم و توفيرا للوسائل العلمية في‬
‫جزءا من الأسباب و البيئة المذكورتين‪ .‬و لسنا ندّعي الأبداع او الأبتكار فيما‬ ‫رجاء ان تكون هذه السلسلة ً‬ ‫هذه البلاد ً‬
‫فعلنا‪ ،‬فقد كثرت كتب تعليم اللغة العربية بالأنجليزية‪ ،‬و ان ّما هذه السلسلة ‪ -‬في حقيقة الأمر – دروس و املاءات امليتها‬
‫علي طلبة العلم عبر سنين‪...‬قد جمعت فيها ما انتشر في الكتب المتداولة للقواعد العربيّة‪ ،‬ثم رتّبتها و ترجمتها بالأنجليزيّة و‬
‫وصلت الي الشكل‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫سجلوها‪ ،‬و ما زلت اصحح الكّراسات‪ ،‬واضيف و احذف حتّي‬ ‫امليتها عليهم كلم ًة كلم ًة‪ .‬فهم ّ‬
‫يسر ﷲ طباعتها‪ .‬و اثرت ان اقسم السلسلة الي قسمين‪ :‬قسم لعلم الصرف‪ ،‬و هو ثلاثة اجزاء‪ ،‬و قسم لعلم‬ ‫المطلوب‪ ،‬و ّ‬
‫النحو‪ ،‬و هو جزءان‪ .‬وارجو ان تمتاز هذه السلسلة بالأمور التالية‪:‬‬

‫عبارة واضحة موزونة سهلة الفهم و الحفظ‪ ،‬تشرح المهم من القواعد من غير تعرض للاختلافات‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫الحفاظ علي المصطلحات الصحيحة المعروفة عند اهل العلم‪ ،‬من غير تغييرها‪ ،‬او وضع مصطلحات جديدة كما‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫هو داب المستشرقين‪ .‬فسوف يري القارئ المصطلحات اللغوية كما هي‪ ،‬بنقل حروفها الي الحروف الأنجليزية‪.‬‬
‫التقدّم التدريجي من اللغة الأنجليزية الي العربية‪ ،‬لكي لأ يتع ّود الطالب علي 'تعلّم العربيّة بالأنجليزيّة'‪ .‬بل حاولنا‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ايلاف الطالب بالكلمات العربيّة‪ ،‬قراء ًة و كتاب ًة حتّي يقدر علي فهم القواعد كلّها باللغة العربيّة‪ ،‬كما هي في‬
‫الجزء الثالث من كتاب "خير التصريف"‪.‬‬
‫الحاق دفتر التمارين بكل جزء من الكتب‪ .‬والتمارين تحتوي علي تطبيقات عملية للقواعد‪ ،‬مع تمرينات تع ّود‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫الطالب علي استخدام المعاجم‪ ،‬واخري لأنشاء ممارسة و علاقة مع القران الكريم‪.‬‬

‫ادعو ﷲ ان يجزي كل الأساتذة والمشائخ و المصنّفين الذين استفدت من علومهم خير الجزاء فان فضل هذه الكتيبات‬
‫يرجع اليهم‪ ،‬و ا ْن يثيب والد ّي خير الثواب‪ ،‬و ان يتقبّل منّي هذا المجهود القليل و يجعله خالصاً لوجهه الكريم‪ ،‬و ينفع به‬
‫الطالبين و المعلّمين‪...‬امين‪..‬‬
‫و اخيرا‪ ،‬لأ اخرا‪ ،‬اشكر تلاميذي الذين ساهموا في اعداد هذه السلسلة‪ ،‬رزقهم ﷲ علما نافعاً و استخدمهم لخدمة الأسلام‪.‬‬

‫العبد الضعيف‬
‫محمد عاصم رشيد‬
‫‪8‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ PREFACE

PREFACE
The correct understanding of the word of Allah and his prophet is one of the
objectives of Islamic faith. The heart of every Muslim yearns to be enlightened with the
treasure of such knowledge. It is goes almost without saying, however, that the root of such
understanding is the mastership of the classical Arabic language in which the Quran was
revealed, and through which the prophet conveyed his message. Over the centuries
innumerable scholars and students have devoted themselves to the learning, teaching and
advancement of this language, and it is indeed an honour to be included in this magnificent
chain of knowledge, notwithstanding our ineptness and shortcomings.
Experience of education experts proves that teaching a subject in the mother tongue of
the student is usually the most effective way to instil a correct understanding of the subject in
the student. The same is the case with languages, except for the very important fact that
languages require a specific environment in order for proficient learning and teaching to take
place. This environment is created by the wise and watchful teacher, through increased usage
of words from the language being taught, frequent giving of easy-to-understand examples for
each grammatical rule, practical written and oral exercises and stressing the importance of
speaking the language, both in out of class. The teacher who uses these methods will surely
familiarize the students with the language, and they will, in a short time become comfortable
with using the language in its written and spoken form. On the contrary, if the grammar of
the language is merely explained in the common language, without utilizing these other
means, or creating the required environment, the student may graduate from the class having
memorized some rules, without an idea of their implementation or usage. This is an issue
that is frequently seen and faced in the matter of teaching Arabic to non-Arabic speaking
students.

It is common knowledge that the majority of people studying Arabic in the Western
countries, as well as some other countries, are English speaking. Not only is English the
language these students rely on to converse, read and write in, but many of them cannot
efficiently express themselves in another language, even that of their parents who may have
migrated to the West from various parts of the world. This is not a strange phenomenon, for
English is a global language, and, in English-speaking countries, it is only normal that people
would grow up accustomed to using English as the sole medium of communication.

For some time now, there has been a pressing need for materials to help English-
speaking students in learning and mastering classical Arabic. This is why we have attempted

9
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ PREFACE
to compile a series of textbooks, with the hope that it will facilitate an efficient learning
experience for the student, while providing the teacher with the tools necessary to cultivate
the ‘environment’ mentioned above.

The compilation of these textbooks began as a series of lessons that I dictated over the
years to my students. The lessons were a summary of information found in various books,
translated into English, and organized to enable an easy understanding of the subject matter.
These lessons were dictated word by word, with plenty of exercises and written assignments
given to supplement them. The students noted these dictations, and then notebooks would be
corrected. After a few years Allah made it easy to compile them in the present form. The
knowledge contained in these books is not, by any means, ‘original’ or ‘new’. Nor is this the
first series of books to be compiled for teaching Arabic to non-Arabs. The knowledge in these
books it is the same as in all texts of classical Arabic, familiar to anyone who has studied or
taught this subject. This series is divided into two parts. The first, consisting of three
volumes, is about Ilm As Ṣarf, the aspect of Arabic grammar dealing with etymology,
morphology and verb conjugations. The second part is Naḥw (syntax) and is in two volumes.
The series is a complete course of classical Arabic, prepared with an intent to present the
knowledge in a manner easily digested and applicable by students of today. We hope that the
following features will make this series an effective and helpful for students and teachers
alike:

o Clear, simple text that is easy to understand and memorize.

o Adherence to the classical terminology. We have not attempted to replace

them with English alternatives, as has been the method of some orientalists.
It is our intent that the student learn the terms in Arabic. To facilitate this,
definitions of terms, their English equivalents, and transliteration has been
provided throughout the books.

o Gradual progression from English to Arabic. The reader will note that an
attempt has been made to familiarize the students with the Arabic
grammatical terminology, so that the student can eventually understand all
the rules and text entirely in Arabic. We do not want the student to develop a
habit of merely ‘learning Arabic in English’, but instead, develop and increase
his/ her confidence in using the Arabic words, so that in time, all learning,
reading and writing may take place in Arabic. This is why volume 3 from the

10
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ PREFACE

Khair Al Taṣreef series is entirely in Arabic, supplemented with appropriate

diacritical markings and sufficient English footnotes provided to aid in correct
understanding of the text.

o Addition of an exercise book to each volume. The exercises are a crucial part
of this learning, and after each key concept, the sections “Grammar in the
Quran” have been added to increase the student’s familiarity with the Quran,
and help him/her understand the applications of what has been taught in
class. The reader will also find the section “Using the Dictionary”. This
section is to teach the proper Arabic translation of English words, and vice
versa. It will also help the student develop a proficiency in using a traditional
(root letter based) Arabic dictionary to find words.

o Addition of appendices consisting of lists of verbs that are commonly used.

In these appendices the reader will find verbs from all bābs1. It is hoped that
the student will memorize these words and their meanings, and incorporate
them into written and oral usage.
o Special formatting, consistent throughout the books, which enables an
effective presentation of the subject matter, and makes the books easier to use.

May Allah immensely reward all the teachers, scholars, and authors whose knowledge
I have benefited from, as they deserve the credit for these booklets, and grant my parents
enormous rewards in this world and the next. May he accept these meagre efforts, and grant
us sincerity in all our endeavours, enabling us to acquire his pleasure.
Last, but certainly not least, I express my heartfelt gratitude to the students who
helped in the compilation, editing and formatting of these books. May Allah grant them the
most beneficial knowledge, and utilize them for the service of his deen.
A lowly servant of Allah
Aasim Rashid
Montreal, Canada
Ramadan 1428 A.H. - October 2007

1 A bāb is a class or group of words conjugated in a similar manner.

11
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ESSENTIAL VOCABULARY – ‫م ْص َط َل َحات ها ّمة‬

َ ‫م ْص‬
ESSENTIAL VOCABULARY – ‫طلَ َحات ها ّمة‬
‫اَ ْمر‬ àmr a verb in which a command is given
‫َباب‬ bāb category of verbs – plural: àbwāb ‫اَ ْب َواب‬
‫َض َّمة‬ dammah short vowel giving a ‘ū’ sound
‫ف َِاعل‬ fā’il subject – the doer of the action
‫فَت َْحة‬ fatḥah short vowel giving a ‘ă’ sound
‫فِ ْعل‬ fi’l verb – plural: àf’āl ‫افْ َعال‬
an intransitive verb – a verb which conveys a complete meaning with a just a fā’il ‫فَا ِعل‬
‫الْ ِف ْعل الْلَازِم‬ fi’l lāzim
(subject / doer)
‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ fi’l ma’rūf a verb in which the fā’il ‫( فَا ِعل‬subject / doer) of the verb is expressed e.g. He did
ِ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم‬
‫اضي‬ fi’l mādī a verb of the past tense – its last letter is maftuḥ ‫َم ْف ُتوح‬
‫ا ْل ِف ْعل ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ fi’l majhūl a verb where the fā’il ‫( فَا ِعل‬subject / doer)of the verb is not known e.g. He was hit

12
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFYING WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR ROOT LETTERS

CLASSIFYING WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR ROOT LETTERS

Depending on the types of letters contained in verbs, they can be divided into 7 types.

ÀF’ĀL ‫اَ ْف َعال‬

1) ṣaḥīḥ ‫الص ِحيح‬

َّ 2) mahmūz ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز‬ 3) mudā’af ‫الْ ُم َضا َعف‬ mu’tal ‫الْ ُم ْع َتل‬

the verbs without any the verbs containing a the verbs containing the verbs containing
ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬ hamza ‫َه ْم َزة‬ repeated letters ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬.
ُ

This category comprises

4 types.

4) mithāl ‫الْ ِمثَال‬ 5) ajwaf ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬ 6) nāqiṣ ‫ال َّناقِص‬ 7) lafīf ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬
(lit. hollow) (lit. incomplete) (lit. wrapped)
the verbs containing a
ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬as the verbs containing a the verbs containing a the verbs containing 2
ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬as ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬as ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬.
ُ
its fà kalimah ‫ف َُاء الْ َك ِل َمة‬
its ‘ayn kalimah ‫َع ْي ُن الْ َك ِل َمة‬ its lām kalimah ‫َلأ ُم الْ َك ِل َمة‬

13
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFYING WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR ROOT LETTERS

1. We have only examined the ṣaḥīḥ ‫ َص ِحيح‬in volume 1.

2. Many Arabic words have ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬, repetitive letters, or hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬in their ḥurūf
àṣliyah ‫ح ُروف ا ْصلِ َّية‬.
ُ These letters may become difficult or awkward to pronounce as the words
take various forms. Since the nature of the Arabic language requires that words be spoken
easily, the above mentioned letters are often altered, made sākin ‫سا ِكن‬, َ or dropped altogether.

‫قُ ْل‬ ← ‫اُ ْق ُو ْل‬

The heaviest of the ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬is the waw ‫واو‬,َ then yà ‫ َياء‬, then àlif1 ‫اَلِف‬.

3. When a ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬is sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬and preceded by a corresponding ḥarakah ‫ح َركَة‬,
َ it is
called madd2 ‫ َم ّد‬. Dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬corresponds with wāw ‫) و ( َواو‬, kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬corresponds with
yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬, and fatḥah ‫ فَت َْحة‬corresponds with àlif ‫) ا ( اَلِف‬.

‫ َيقُو ُل‬, ‫َي ِبي ُع‬

When a wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬or a yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬is preceded by a fatḥah ‫فَت َْحة‬, it is called līn3 ‫لِين‬.

‫ َق ْو ٌل‬, ‫َب ْي ٌع‬

َ there is neither madd ‫ َم ّد‬nor līn ‫لِين‬,
When a word begins with a ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬,

1 Note that there is difference between àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬and hamza ‫) ء ( َه ْم َزة‬. Àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬is always sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬and there is no jerking
sound, instead it is pronounced easily. If there is an àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬that has a ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬on it, or it is sākin ‫كن‬
ِ ‫ َسا‬but a jerking sound is
emitted while pronouncing it, then it is in fact a hamza ‫) ء ( َه ْم َزة‬

ْ
‫اَ َم َر‬, ‫ َساَ َل‬, ‫ق ََر َء‬, ‫س‬ ٌ ‫ ُبؤ‬, ‫ِذئْ ٌب‬
ٌ ‫ َرا‬, ‫ْس‬
2 literally means to extend because the letters are stretched when pronouncing it
3 literally means softness – this reflects the way in which these letters are pronounced

14
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFYING WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR ROOT LETTERS

4. The following is a list of the changes made to words in order to make them more
pronounceable. These changes will be made in words containing ḥurūf ul ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬or
repetitive letters, or a hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬. The changes are made based on specific rules laid out in
the Arabic language, which will be studied in detail in the following chapters.

(1) ḥadhf ‫ َح ْذف‬: (lit. to omit) – this rule involves omitting a ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬

‫لَ ْم َي ْد ُع‬ ← ‫َي ْد ُع ْو‬

(2) ìbdāl ‫اِ ْبدَال‬: (lit. to replace) – this rule involves replacing one letter with another

‫َق َل‬ ← ‫َق َو َل‬

‫َم َن‬ ← ‫اَا ْ َم َن‬
َ ‫ا ِْس‬: (lit. to make sākin ‫ – َ)سا ِكن‬to drop the ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬of a letter
(3) ìskān ‫كان‬

‫َي ْد ُع ْو‬ ← ‫َي ْد ُع ُو‬

(4) ìdghām ‫اِ ْدغَام‬: (lit. to join two things) – this rule involves joining two similar letters and
reading them as one:

‫َذ َّب‬ ← ‫َذ َب َب‬

5. The alterations made to: (1) ì’lāl ‫ اِ ْعلَال‬or ta’līl
mu’tal ‫الْ ُم ْع َتل‬ are called
‫َت ْعلِيل‬
(2) mahmūz ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز‬ are called takhfīf ‫تَخْ ِفيف‬
(3) mudā’af ‫الْ ُم َضا َعف‬ are called ìdghām ‫اِ ْدغَام‬

15
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF MITHĀL - ‫الْ ِمثَال‬

RULES OF MITHĀL – ‫الْ ِم َثال‬

MU’TAL FÀ – ‫ُم ْع َتل الْفَاء‬

MITHĀL ‫ الْ ِمثَال‬IS A WORD THAT HAS A ḤARF UL ‘ILLAH ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬AS ITS FÀ KALIMAH ‫ ف َُاء الْ َكلِ َمة‬MAKING IT
MU’TAL FÀ ‫ ُم ْع َتل الْفَاء‬. IF THE ḤARF ‫ َح ْرف‬IS WĀW ‫َواو‬ ( ‫) و‬, THE WORD IS CLASSIFIED AS MITHĀL WĀWĪ ‫الْ ِمثَال ال َوا ِو ّي‬. IF
IT IS A YÀ ‫( َياء‬ ‫) ي‬, THEN IT WILL BE CLASSIFIED AS MITHĀL YĀ`Ī ‫الْ ِمثَال الْ َيائِ ّي‬
M1. That wāw sākin ‫ َواو َسا ِكن‬which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah ‫وحة‬
َ ‫َعلَا َمة الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْف ُت‬
and kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬will drop

‫َي ِع ُد‬ ←
rule M1
‫َي ْو ِع ُد‬ ‫ْو‬
wāw sākin ( ) appearing between
‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah

Note: The maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬of this verb is ‫ ِع َد ًة‬, in consideration of the ta’līl ‫ َت ْعلِيل‬that was made in
mudari’ ‫ ُم َضارِع‬. As the original maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬was ‫ َو ْعدًا‬, the wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬was dropped from the
maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬as it was dropped in mudari’ ‫ ُم َضارِع‬so the tà ‫ ) ة ( تَاء‬was added to replace the wāw
‫) و ( َواو‬.

M2. If a verb has a ḥarf ḥalaqī ‫ َح ْرف َح َل ِق ّي‬as its ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن ا ْل َك ِل َمة‬or lām kalimah ‫ َلأ ُم ا ْل َك ِل َمة‬and a wāw
sākin ‫ َواو َسا ِكن‬appears between the ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah ‫وحة‬ َ ‫ َعلَا َمة الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْف ُت‬and the ‘ayn
kalimah maftuḥah ‫وحة‬ َ ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة الْ َم ْف ُت‬. the wāw ‫ َواو‬will drop
←
1

‫َي َه ُب‬ rule M2 ‫َي ْو َه ُب‬ ‫ْو‬

wāw sākin ( ) appearing between
‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and
‘ayn kalimah maftuḥah
←
2

‫َي َض ُع‬ rule M2

‫َي ْو َض ُع‬ ‘ayn kalimah (‫ ) ه‬is a ḥarf ḥalaqī in e.g. 1
lām kalimah ( ‫ ) ع‬is a ḥarf ḥalaqī in e.g. 2

16
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF MITHĀL - ‫الْ ِمثَال‬
M3. That wāw sākin ‫( َواو َسا ِكن‬without tashdīd ‫)تَشْ ِديد‬1 preceded by a ḥarf maksūr ‫ َح ْرف َم ْك ُسور‬gets
changed to a yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬

‫ِم ْي َزا ٌن‬ ←

rule M3
‫ِم ْو َزا ٌن‬
‫ْو‬
wāw sākin ( ) preceded by a ḥarf maksūr

‫اِ ْيقَا ٌد‬ ← ‫اِ ْو َقا ٌد‬

rule M3

M4. That yà sākin ‫( َياء َسا ِكن‬without tashdīd ‫)تَشْ ِديد‬2 preceded by a ḥarf madmūm ‫ َح ْرف َمضْ ُموم‬gets
changed to a wāw ‫) و ( َواو‬

‫ُم ْوقِ ٌن‬ ←

rule M4
‫ُم ْي ِق ٌن‬ yà sākin ( ‫ ) ْي‬preceded by a ḥarf madmūm

M5. The original wāw ‫ َواو‬or yà ‫( َياء‬which are from the ḥuruf aṣliyah ‫)ح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬
ُ that appears beside the
tà ‫ ) ت ( تَاء‬of ‘‫ ’اِ ْف ِت َعال‬changes to a tà ‫) ت ( تَاء‬and the two tà ‫) ت ( تَاء‬are joined by ìdghām ‫اِ ْدغَام‬

‫اِتَّ َق َد‬ ← ‫اِ ْو َت َق َد‬

1

rule M5 the original wāw ( ‫ ) و‬in e.g. 1

‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 2
‫اِتَّ َس َر‬ ← ‫اِ ْي َت َس َر‬
2 and yà (

rule M5 appearing beside the tà ( ‫ ) ت‬of ‘‫’اِفْتِ َعال‬

1 as opposed to ‫ اِ ْجلِ َّواذ‬with tashdīd ‫ تَشْ ِديد‬in which this ta’līl ‫ َت ْعلِيل‬will not take place
2 as opposed to ‫ يل‬with tashdīd ‫ تَشْ ِديد‬in which this ta’līl ‫ َتعلِيل‬will not take place
َ ِّ ُ‫خ‬ ْ
17
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫) الْ َو ْع ُد ( الْ ِمثَال – ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL‬‬

‫‪ – to promise‬الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َماضي‬
‫ِ ‪1‬‬

‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َع َد‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِع َد‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َع ُد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َي ِع ُد‬ ‫ُو ِع َد‬ ‫َو َع َد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َع َدا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِعدَا‬

‫‪M1‬‬
‫ُي ْو َعد ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬
‫َي ِعد ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ُو ِعدَا‬ ‫َو َعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِعد ُْوا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َعد ُْو َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َي ِعد ُْو َن‬ ‫ُو ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َع َد‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِع َد‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َع ُد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َت ِع ُد‬ ‫ُو ِع َد ْت‬ ‫َو َع َد ْت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َعدَا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِعدَا‬

‫‪M1‬‬
‫تُ ْو َعد ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬
‫َت ِعد ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫ُو ِع َدتَا‬ ‫َو َع َدتَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِع ْد َن‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َي ِع ْد َن‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َو َع ْد َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َع َد‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِع َد‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َع ُد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َت ِع ُد‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد َت‬ ‫َو َع ْد َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َعدَا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِعدَا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َان‬‫ُت ْو َعد ِ‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َان‬‫َت ِعد ِ‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد ُت َما‬ ‫َو َع ْد ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِعد ُْوا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َعد ُْو َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َت ِعد ُْو َن‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد ُت ْم‬ ‫َو َع ْد ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َع ِدي‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِع ِدي‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َع ِد َين‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َت ِع ِد َين‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد ِت‬ ‫َو َع ْد ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َعدَا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِعدَا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َان‬ ‫تُ ْو َعد ِ‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َان‬ ‫َت ِعد ِ‬ ‫ُو ِع ْدتُ َما‬ ‫َو َع ْدتُ َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِع ْد َن‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َت ِع ْد َن‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد ُت َّن‬ ‫َو َع ْد ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن اُ ْو َع َد‬ ‫لَ ْن اَ ِع َد‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫اُ ْو َع ُد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫اَ ِع ُد‬ ‫ُو ِع ْد ُت‬ ‫َو َع ْد ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لَ ْن نُ ْو َع َد‬ ‫لَ ْن َن ِع َد‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫نُ ْو َع ُد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫نَ ِع ُد‬ ‫ُو ِع ْدنَا‬ ‫َو َع ْدنَا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop.‬‬

‫‪1 Both the mudāri’ manfī‬‬ ‫اضي الْ َم ْن ِفي ‪ and the mādī manfī‬الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ِفي‬
‫الص ْرف ‪ have been omitted for the sake of brevity as there is no ṣarf‬الْ َم ِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪, but the student should still know and be able to recite them. This‬الْ ُمث َْبت ‪change taking place different than those occurring in muthbat‬‬
‫‪remains the same for the remaining chapters of the book‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ُي ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫لَ َي ِع َد ْن‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْو َع ْد‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِع ْد‬
‫‪M1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُي ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َع ِد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع ِد ْن‬ ‫َل ُت ْو َع ِد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع ِد َّن‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْو َع ِدي‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِع ِدي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ ُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َك ِّلم‬

‫لَ ُن ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َن ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لَ ُن ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل َن ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نَ ِع ْد‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َع ْد‬ ‫لِ َي ِع ْد‬
‫‪M1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُي ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َع ِد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ِد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ِد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ِد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ِدي‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ِدي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع َدا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِأ ُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لِ ُن ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِع َد ْن‬ ‫لِ ُن ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِع َد َّن‬ ‫لِ ُن ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِع ْد‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع َد َّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َع ْد‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع ْد‬
‫‪M1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َعدَا‬ ‫َلأ َي ِعدَا‬
‫‪M1‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ ُي ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع َد َّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع َد َّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ْد‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ُد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ُد ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ُد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ُد َّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعد ُْوا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعد ُْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ِد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ِد ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ِد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ِد َّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ِدي‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ِدي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َعدَا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِعدَا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ْدنَا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َع ْد َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِع ْد َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ اُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِع َد َّن‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِع ْد‬ ‫َوا ِحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫َلأ نُ ْو َع َد ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِع َد ْن‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْو َع َد َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِع َد َّن‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْو َع ْد‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِع ْد‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫َوا ِعد ٌ‬
‫َات‬ ‫َوا ِع َدت َِان‬ ‫َوا ِع َد ٌة‬ ‫َوا ِعدُو َن‬ ‫َوا ِعد َِان‬ ‫َوا ِع ٌد‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫ات‬
‫َم ْو ُعو َد ٌ‬ ‫َم ْو ُعو َدت َِان‬ ‫َم ْو ُعو َد ٌة‬ ‫َم ْو ُعو ُدو َن‬ ‫َم ْو ُعو َد ِان‬ ‫َم ْو ُعو ٌد‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫ُو َع ٌد‬ ‫ات‬

‫ُو ْع َد َي ٌ‬ ‫ُو ْع َد َي ِان‬ ‫ُو ْعدَى‬ ‫اَ َوا ِع ُد‬ ‫اَ ْو َعدُو َن‬ ‫اَ ْو َعد َِان‬ ‫اَ ْو َع ُد‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َم َوا ِع ُد‬ ‫َم ْو ِعد َِان‬ ‫َم ْو ِع ٌد‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َم َوا ِع ُد‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َعد َِان‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َع ٌد‬
‫َم َوا ِع ُد‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َع َدت َِان‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َع َد ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َوا ِعي ُد‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َعا َد ِان‬ ‫‪M3‬‬ ‫ِم ْي َعا ٌد‬
‫‪M3. That wāw sākin (without tashdīd) preceded by a ḥarf maksūr gets changed to a yà‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫الْ َو ْع ُد‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ِمثَال ‪EXAMPLE OF MITHĀL -‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF ÀJWAF – ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬

RULES OF ÀJWAF – ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬

MU’TAL ‘AYN – ‫ُم ْع َتل الْ َع ْين‬

ÀJWAF ‫ ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬IS A WORD THAT HAS A ḤARF UL ‘ILLAH ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬AS ITS ‘AYN KALIMAH ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬. DEPENDING ON
WHETHER THE ḤARF ‫ َح ْرف‬IS WĀW ‫َواو‬ ( ‫ ) و‬OR YÀ ‫) ي ( َياء‬, THE WORD WILL BE CLASSIFIED AS ÀJWAF WĀWĪ
‫ ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف ال َوا ِو ّي‬OR YĀ`Ī ‫ا ْل َيائِ ّي‬.

A1. That wāw ‫ َواو‬or yà mutaḥarrikah ‫ َياء ُم َت َح ِّر َكة‬which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ ‫ َح ْرف َم ْف ُتوح‬is changed
to àlif ‫اَلِف‬

‫َقا َل‬ ← ‫َق َو َل‬

1

rule A1
wāw mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) و‬in e.g. 1
←
2

‫َبا َع‬ rule A1

‫َب َي َع‬ and yà mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 2
preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ

A2. When the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬of mādī ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫ َم‬from thulāthī mujarrad ‫ الثل ِث ّي ا ْل ُم َج َّرد‬drops
due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫الساك َن ْين‬ ِ ِ
َّ ‫ا ْج ِت َماع‬, and the verb is not maksūr al ‘ayn ‫ َم ْك ُسور الْ َع ْين‬, then the fà
kalimah ‫ ف َُاء ا ْل َك ِل َمة‬will be madmūm ‫َمضْ ُموم‬

‫قُ ْل َن‬ ←
rule A2
‫َقاْلْ َن‬ ←
rule A1
‫َق َولْ َن‬ wāw mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) و‬which is not
maksūrah changes to àlif by rule A1

ḥarf sākin followed by another ḥarf sākin

(ijtemā’ as sākinayn)

A3. When the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬of mādī ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫ َم‬from thulāthī mujarrad ‫ الثلثِ ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬drops due
to ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫السا ِك َن ْين‬
َّ ‫اِ ْج ِت َماع‬, the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء ا ْل َك ِل َمة‬is given a kasrah ‫ك َْس َرة‬

‫بِ ْع َن‬ ←
rule A3
‫َباْ ْع َن‬ ←
rule A1
‫َب َي ْع َن‬ yà mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) ي‬changes to
àlif by rule A1

ḥarf sākin followed by another ḥarf sākin

(ijtemā’ as sākinayn)

24
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF ÀJWAF – ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬

A4. When the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬of mādī ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫ َم‬from thulāthī mujarrad ‫ الثل ِث ّي ا ْل ُم َج َّرد‬drops
due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫السا ِك َن ْين‬ َّ ‫اِ ْج ِت َماع‬, and the verb is maksūr al ‘ayn ‫ َم ْك ُسور الْ َع ْين‬, then the fà
ِ
kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الكل َمة‬will be maksūr ‫َم ْك ُسور‬
َ ْ

←
rule A4
ْ‫ا‬ ←
rule A1
‫ِو‬ wāw maksūrah ( ‫)و‬
changes to àlif by rule A1

ḥarf sākin followed by another ḥarf sākin

(ijtemā’ as sākinayn)

A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah ‫ َواو َمضْ ُمو َمة‬or a yà maksūrah ‫ َياء َم ْك ُسو َرة‬preceded by a ḥarf sākin ‫َح ْرف‬
‫سا ِكن‬,
َ then the ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬will be given to the preceding letter.

‫َي ُق ْو ُل‬ ← ‫َي ْق ُو ُل‬

1

rule A5
wāw madmūmah ( ‫ ) ُو‬in e.g. 1
‫َيبِ ْي ُع‬ ← ‫َي ْبيِ ُع‬
2
and yà maksūrah ( ‫ي‬ ِ ) in e.g. 2
rule A5
preceded by a ḥarf sākin

A6. That wāw ‫ َواو‬or yà ‫ َياء‬maftūḥah ‫وحة‬ َ ‫ َم ْف ُت‬which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin ‫ َح ْرف َسا ِكن‬will have fatḥah
‫ فَت َْحة‬given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif ‫اَلِف‬

← ← ‫ُي ْق َو ُل‬
1

‫ُيقَا ُل‬ ‫ُي َق ْو ُل‬ rule A6

wāw maftuḥah ( ‫ ) َو‬in e.g. 1
← ← and yà maftuḥah ( ‫ي‬
2

‫ُي َبا ُع‬ ‫ُي َب ْي ُع‬ rule A6

‫ُي ْب َي ُع‬ َ ) in e.g. 2
preceded by a ḥarf sākin

25
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF ÀJWAF – ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف‬
A7. That wāw ‫ َواو‬or yà ‫ َياء‬that appears after àlif zāìdah ‫( اَلِف َزائِدَة‬not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah ‫)ح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬
ُ
will be changed to a hamza ‫َه ْم َزة‬

‫َقائِ ٌل‬ ← ‫َقا ِو ٌل‬

1

rule A7
‫ ) و‬in e.g. 1 and yà ( ‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 2
‫َبائِ ٌع‬
wāw (
← ‫َبايِ ٌع‬
2
after àlif zāìdah
rule A7

A8. When a wāw ‫ َواو‬or yà ‫ َياء‬mutaḥarrik ‫ ُم َت َح ِّرك‬comes in the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن ا ْل َكلِ َمة‬of mādi majhūl ‫اضي‬
ِ ‫الْ َم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬, its ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬is given to its preceding letter, after making it sākin ‫َسا ِكن‬

‫قِ ْي َل‬ ← ‫قِ ْو َل‬ ← ‫ْق ِو َل‬ ← ‫قُ ِو َل‬

1

rule M3 rule A5 rule A8

wāw mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) و‬in e.g. 1
yà mutaḥarrikah ( ‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 2

‫بِ ْي َع‬ ← ‫ْبيِ َع‬ ← ‫ُبيِ َع‬

2
coming in the ‘ayn kalimah of
rule A5 rule A8 mādi majhūl

A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫السا ِك َن ْين‬

َّ ‫ اِ ْجتِ َماع‬takes place, the first ḥarf sākin ‫ َح ْرف َساكِن‬drops

‫لَ ْم َي ُق ْل‬ ← ‫لَ ْم َي ُق ْو ْل‬ ← ‫َيقُو ُل‬

rule A9
‫لَ ْم‬

ḥarf sākin followed by another ḥarf sākin

(ijtemā’ as sākinayn)

26
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪RULES OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪27‬‬
‫الْ َق ْو ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫) ال َق ْو ُل ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫‪ – to say‬الْ َق ْو ُل (ن) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُيقَا َل‬ ‫لَ ْن َيقُو َل‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ُيقَا ُل‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َيقُو ُل‬ ‫ِقي َل‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َقا َل‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُيقَا َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن َيقُو َلأ‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫أن‬‫ُيقَا َل ِ‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫أن‬‫َيقُو َل ِ‬ ‫ِقيلَا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َقا َلأ‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َيقَالُ ْوا‬ ‫َل ْن َيقُولُ ْوا‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ُيقَالُو َن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َيقُولُو َن‬ ‫ِقيلُ ْوا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َقالُ ْوا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُقَا َل‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُو َل‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُقَا ُل‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َتقُو ُل‬ ‫ِقي َل ْت‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َقالَ ْت‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْن تُقَا َلأ‬ ‫َل ْن َتقُو َلأ‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫أن‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫تُقَا َل ِ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫أن‬ ‫َتقُو َل ِ‬ ‫ِقي َل َتا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َقالَ َتا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْن ُي َق ْل َن‬ ‫َل ْن َي ُق ْل َن‬

‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ُي َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َي ُق ْل َن‬ ‫قُ ْل َن‬ ‫‪A1,A2‬‬ ‫قُ ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُقَا َل‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُو َل‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُقَا ُل‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َتقُو ُل‬ ‫قُ ْل َت‬ ‫قُ ْل َت‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُو َلأ‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫أن‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫ُتقَا َل ِ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫أن‬ ‫َتقُو َل ِ‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َما‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َما‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت َقالُ ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُولُ ْوا‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫تُقَالُو َن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َتقُولُو َن‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت ْم‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت ْم‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقَالِي‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُولِي‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ين‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُقَالِ َ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ين‬ ‫َتقُولِ َ‬ ‫قُ ْل ِت‬ ‫قُ ْل ِت‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُقَا َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن َتقُو َلأ‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫أن‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫تُقَا َل ِ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫أن‬ ‫َتقُو َل ِ‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َما‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َما‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ َق ْل َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُق ْل َن‬

‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫تُ َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َت ُق ْل َن‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َّن‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت َّن‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن اُ َقا َل‬ ‫لَ ْن اَقُو َل‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اُ َقا ُل‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫اَقُو ُل‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت‬ ‫قُ ْل ُت‬
‫‪A1,A2‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نُقَا َل‬ ‫لَ ْن نَقُو َل‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫نُقَا ُل‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫نَقُو ُل‬ ‫قُ ْل َنا‬ ‫‪A1,A2‬‬ ‫قُ ْل َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A2. When the ‘ayn kalimah ‘wāw’ of mādī from thulāthī mujarrad drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn, and the verb is not maksūr al ‘ayn, then‬‬
‫‪the fà kalimah will be madmūm‬‬
‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A8. When a wāw or yà mutaḥarrik comes in the ‘ayn kalimah of mādi majhūl, its ḥarakah is given to its preceding letter, after making it‬‬
‫‪sākin‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪28‬‬
‫الْ َق ْو ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َق ْو ُل (ن) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َيقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َيقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َيقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُيقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َيقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُيقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َيقُولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُيقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َيقُولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُيقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل ْم َيقُولُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَا َل ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَا َل َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ َي ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُقو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُتقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتقُولُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالِ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولِ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَالِ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُولِ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُتقَالِي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُقولِي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َل َت ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َقا َل ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأَقُو َل ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َقا َل َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأَقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَقُ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُنقَا َل ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َنقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُنقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َنقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َن ُق ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪29‬‬
‫الْ َق ْو ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َق ْو ُل (ن) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُيقَالَ ْن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫لِ َيقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬‫لِ ُي َق ْل‬ ‫لِ َي ُق ْل‬
‫‪A5,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َيقُولُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َتقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َتقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َت ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫قُ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ُقو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ُقولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ُقولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالِ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولِ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالِ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولِ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَالِي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُولِي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫قُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َقا َل ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِأَقُو َل ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َقالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِأَقُو َل َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِأَقُ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُنقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َنقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُنقَا َل َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َنقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َن ُق ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪30‬‬
‫الْ َق ْو ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َق ْو ُل (ن) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُيقَالَ ْن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُولَ ْن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫َلأ ُيقَالَ َّن‬ ‫َلأ َيقُولَ َّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيقَا َلأ ِّن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُو َلأ ِّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقُولُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولَ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولَ َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالُ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالُ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالُوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالِ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولِ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالِ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولِ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَالِي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُولِي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُتقَا َلأ‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َتقُو َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َق ْل َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق ْل َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َقالَ ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ اَقُو َل ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َقالَ َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ اَقُو َل َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ اَقُ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُقَا َل ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َنقُو َل ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُقَا َل َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َنقُو َل َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َق ْل‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ُق ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪31‬‬
‫الْ َق ْو ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َو ْع ُد (ض) – الْ ِمثَال الْ َوا ِو ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َقائِل ٌ‬
‫َات‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َقائِ َل َت ِان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َقائِ َل ٌة‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َقائِلُو َن‬ ‫‪A7‬‬
‫َقائِل ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َقائِ ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمقُو َل ٌ‬
‫أت‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمقُولَ َت ِان‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمقُولَ ٌة‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمقُولُو َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬
‫َمقُو َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمقُو ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫قُ َو ٌل‬ ‫قُ ْولَ َي ٌ‬

‫ات‬ ‫قُ ْولَ َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ْولَى‬ ‫اَ َقا ِو ُل‬ ‫اَ ْق َولُو َن‬ ‫اَ ْق َو َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫اَ ْق َو ُل‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َمقَا ِو ُل‬ ‫‪A6‬‬

‫َمقَا َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َمقَا ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َمقَا ِو ُل‬ ‫ِم ْق َو َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫ِم ْق َو ٌل‬
‫َمقَا ِو ُل‬ ‫ِم ْق َولَ َت ِان‬ ‫ِم ْق َولَ ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َمقَاوِي ُل‬ ‫ِم ْق َوا َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫ِم ْق َوا ٌل‬
‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A7.‬‬ ‫‪That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamzah‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪32‬‬
‫الْ َب ْي ُع‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫) الْ َب ْي ُع ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫‪ – to sell‬الْ َب ْي ُع (ض) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َيا ِء ّي‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ْن ُي َبا َع‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِبي َع‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫ُي َبا ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َي ِبي ُع‬ ‫بِي َع‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َبا َع‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي َبا َعا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِبي َعا‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫ُي َبا َع ِان‬ ‫َي ِبي َع ِان‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َعا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َبا َعا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َي َبا ُع ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِبي ُع ْوا‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫ُي َبا ُعو َن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َي ِبي ُعو َن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ُع ْوا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َبا ُع ْوا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َبا َع‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي َع‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫تُ َبا ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َت ِبي ُع‬ ‫بِي َع ْت‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َبا َع ْت‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َبا َعا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي َعا‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫تُ َبا َع ِان‬ ‫َت ِبي َع ِان‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َع َتا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫َبا َع َتا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي َب ْع َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِب ْع َن‬

‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ُي َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َي ِب ْع َن‬ ‫بِ ْع َن‬ ‫‪A1,A3‬‬‫بِ ْع َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َبا َع‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي َع‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫تُ َبا ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َت ِبي ُع‬ ‫بِ ْع َت‬ ‫بِ ْع َت‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت َبا َعا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي َعا‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫ُت َبا َع ِان‬ ‫َت ِبي َع ِان‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َما‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َما‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت َبا ُع ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي ُع ْوا‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫تُ َبا ُعو َن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َت ِبي ُعو َن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت ْم‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت ْم‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت َبا ِعي‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي ِعي‬

‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُ َبا ِع َ‬
‫ين‬ ‫َت ِبي ِع َ‬
‫ين‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِ ْع ِت‬ ‫بِ ْع ِت‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َبا َعا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِبي َعا‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫تُ َبا َع ِان‬ ‫َت ِبي َع ِان‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َما‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َما‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ َب ْع َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِب ْع َن‬

‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫تُ َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َت ِب ْع َن‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َّن‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت َّن‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن اُ َبا َع‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن اَبِي َع‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫اُ َبا ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫اَبِي ُع‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت‬ ‫بِ ْع ُت‬
‫‪A1,A3‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لَ ْن نُ َبا َع‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نَ ِبي َع‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫نُ َبا ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫نَ ِبي ُع‬ ‫بِ ْع َنا‬ ‫‪A1,A3‬‬‫بِ ْع َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A3. When the ‘ayn kalimah yà of mādī from thulāthī mujarrad drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn, the fà kalimah is given a kasrah‬‬
‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A8. When a wāw or yà mutaḥarrik comes in the ‘ayn kalimah of mādi majhūl, its ḥarakah is given to its preceding letter, after making it‬‬
‫‪sākin‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪33‬‬
‫الْ َب ْي ُع‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َب ْي ُع (ض) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َيا ِء ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُي َبا ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َي ِبي ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُي َبا ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َي ِبي ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ِبي ُعوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِب ْع َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِبي ُعوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َت ِبي ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل َت ِبي ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْم تُ َبا ِعي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ِبي ِعي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِب ْع َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َبِي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َبِي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم اَبِ ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُن َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َن ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُن َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لَ َن ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نَ ِب ْع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪34‬‬
‫الْ َب ْي ُع‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َب ْي ُع (ض) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َيا ِء ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ ُي َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬‫لِ ُي َب ْع‬ ‫لِ َي ِب ْع‬
‫‪A5,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِبي ُعوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ِب ْع َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫بِ ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ُع ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا ِعي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي ِعي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫بِي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫بِ ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫بِ ْع َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِأ َبِي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِأ َبِي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِأ َبِ ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َن ِب ْع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪35‬‬
‫الْ َب ْي ُع‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َب ْي ُع (ض) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َيا ِء ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي َبا َع ْن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َلأ َي ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي َبا َع َّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِبي َع َّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬‫َلأ ُي َب ْع‬ ‫َلأ َي ِب ْع‬
‫‪A5,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َبا َعا ِّن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِبي َعا ِّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ ُي َبا ُع ْن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َلأ َي ِبي ُع ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي َبا ُع َّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِبي ُع َّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِبي ُعوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ َبا َع ْن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A5‬‬‫َلأ َت ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َع َّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َع َّن‬
‫‪A5‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِب ْع َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِب ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ُع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ُع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ُعوا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ُعوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ِع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ِع َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا ِعي‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي ِعي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َبا َعا‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِبي َعا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِب ْع َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ َب ْع َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِب ْع َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ اَبِي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُا َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ اَبِي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ اَبِ ْع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َبا َع ْن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِبي َع ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َبا َع َّن‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِبي َع َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َب ْع‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ِب ْع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪36‬‬
‫الْ َب ْي ُع‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫الْ َب ْي ُع (ض) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َيا ِء ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ َع ٌ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ َع َت ِان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ َع ٌة‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ ُعو َن‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ َع ِان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫َبائِ ٌع‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي َع ٌ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي َع َت ِان‬ ‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي َع ٌة‬ ‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي ُعو َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي َع ِان‬ ‫‪A5,A9,A3‬‬ ‫َم ِبي ٌع‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫ُب َي ٌع‬ ‫ات‬

‫ُب ْي َع َي ٌ‬ ‫ُب ْي َع َي ِان‬ ‫ُب ْي َعى‬ ‫اَ َبايِ ُع‬ ‫اَ ْب َي ُعو َن‬ ‫اَ ْب َي َع ِان‬ ‫اَ ْب َي ُع‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َم َبايِ ُع‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َم ِب ْي َع ِان‬ ‫‪A5‬‬ ‫َم ِب ْي ٌع‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َم َبايِ ُع‬ ‫ِم ْب َي َع ِان‬ ‫ِم ْب َي ٌع‬
‫َم َبايِ ُع‬ ‫ِم ْب َي َع َت ِان‬ ‫ِم ْب َي َع ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َبايِي ُع‬ ‫ِم ْب َيا َع ِان‬ ‫ِم ْب َيا ٌع‬
‫‪A3. When the ‘ayn kalimah yà of mādī from thulāthī mujarrad drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn, the fà kalimah is given a kasrah‬‬
‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A7.‬‬ ‫‪That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamzah‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪37‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫ف ( ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫) الْخَ ْو ُ‬
‫ف (س) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬ ‫‪ – to have fear‬الْخَ ْو ُ‬
‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُيخَ َ‬
‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن َيخَ َ‬
‫اف‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬
‫ُيخَ ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬‫َيخَ ُ‬ ‫يف‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫ِخ َ‬ ‫اف‬
‫‪A1‬‬‫خَ َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُيخَ ا َفا‬ ‫لَ ْن َيخَ ا َفا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ُيخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َيخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫ِخيفَا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫خَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َيخَ افُ ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َيخَ افُ ْوا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ُيخَ افُو َن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َيخَ افُو َن‬ ‫ِخي ُف ْوا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫خَ افُ ْوا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬‫لَ ْن تُخَ َ‬ ‫اف‬‫لَ ْن َتخَ َ‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬‫تُخَ ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫َتخَ ُ‬ ‫َت‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫ِخيف ْ‬ ‫خَ ا َف ْت‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ا َفا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َتخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫ِخي َف َتا‬
‫‪A8‬‬ ‫خَ ا َف َتا‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َيخَ ْف َن‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ُيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫ِخ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬ ‫ِخ ْف َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن تُخَ َ‬ ‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ َ‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫تُخَ ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫َتخَ ُ‬ ‫ِخ ْف َت‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ا َفا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ُتخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َتخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫ِخ ْف ُت َما‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ افُ ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ افُ ْوا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُخَ افُو َن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َتخَ افُو َن‬ ‫ِخ ْف ُت ْم‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ا ِفي‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُخَ ا ِف َ‬
‫ين‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َتخَ ا ِف َ‬
‫ين‬ ‫ِخ ْف ِت‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ا َفا‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫تُخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َتخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫ِخ ْف ُت َما‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُخَ ْف َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َتخَ ْف َن‬

‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫تُخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َتخَ ْف َن‬ ‫ِخ ْف ُت َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن اُخَ َ‬ ‫اف‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫لَ ْن اَخَ َ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫اُخَ ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫اَخَ ُ‬ ‫ِخ ْف ُت‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬‫ِخ ْف ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن نُخَ َ‬ ‫اف‬ ‫لَ ْن نَخَ َ‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫نُخَ ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫اف‬ ‫نَخَ ُ‬ ‫ِخ ْف َنا‬ ‫‪A1,A4‬‬ ‫ِخ ْف َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A4. When the ‘ayn kalimah wāw of mādī from thulāthī mujarrad drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn and the verb is maksūr al ‘ayn, then the‬‬
‫‪fà kalimah will be maksūr‬‬
‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A8. When a wāw or yà mutaḥarrik comes in the ‘ayn kalimah of mādi majhūl, its ḥarakah is given to its preceding letter, after making it‬‬
‫‪sākin‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪38‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫ف (س) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬ ‫الْخَ ْو ُ‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ُيخَ ا َف ْن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫لَ َيخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم ُيخَ ْ‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم َيخَ ْ‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫َل َيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ْم َيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُيخَ افُوا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َيخَ افُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ َيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم َيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ افُوا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ افُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُتخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ َتخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َتخَ ْف َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬‫َل ْم ُاخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬‫َل ْم َاخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ ُنخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لَ َنخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل ُنخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َل َنخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُخَ ْ‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نَخَ ْ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪39‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫ف (س) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬ ‫الْخَ ْو ُ‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ ُيخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ َيخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ْ‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ ُيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ َيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ افُوا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ افُوا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ ُتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ َتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ْ‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َتخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َتخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُيخَ ْف َن‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َيخَ ْف َن‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬‫لِ ُتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬
‫خَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ افُوا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ افُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا ِفي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫خَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫خَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُتخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫خَ ْف َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ َخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ ُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِأ َخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لِأ ُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬‫لِأ َخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُنخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َنخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ ُنخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫لِ َنخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لِ ُنخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫لِ َنخَ ْ‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪40‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫ف (س) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬ ‫الْخَ ْو ُ‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A6‬‬‫َلأ ُيخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ْ‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ْ‬
‫‪A6,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ا َفا ِّن‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ا َفا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬‫َلأ ُيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ افُوا‬
‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ افُوا‬
‫‪A6‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َيخَ ْف َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ افُ ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ افُ َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ افُوا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ افُوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا ِف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا ِف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا ِفي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ا َفا‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ا َفا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ْف َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُخَ ْف َن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َتخَ ْف َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اَخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ اَخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬‫َلأ اُخَ ْ‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫ف‬‫َلأ اَخَ ْ‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نَخَ ا َف ْن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نُخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َلأ نَخَ ا َف َّن‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ نُخَ ْ‬
‫ف‬ ‫‪A6,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ نَخَ ْ‬
‫ف‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A6. That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪41‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫ف (س) – ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫الْخَ ْو ُ‬
‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫‪A7‬‬ ‫خَ ائِف ٌ‬

‫َات‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫خَ ائِ َف َت ِان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫خَ ائِ َف ٌة‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫خَ ائِفُو َن‬ ‫‪A7‬‬
‫خَ ائِف ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫‪A7‬‬ ‫خَ ائِ ٌ‬
‫ف‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمخُ و َف ٌ‬
‫ات‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمخُ و َف َت ِان‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمخُ و َف ٌة‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمخُ وفُو َن‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫َمخُ و َف ِان‬ ‫‪A5,A9‬‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول َمخُ ٌ‬
‫وف‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫ف‬
‫خُ َو ٌ‬ ‫خُ ْو َف َي ٌ‬
‫ات‬ ‫خُ ْو َف َي ِان‬ ‫خُ ْو َفى‬ ‫اَخَ او ُ‬
‫ِف‬ ‫اَخْ َوفُو َن‬ ‫اَخْ َو َف ِان‬ ‫اَخْ َو ُ‬
‫ف‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ِف‬
‫َمخَ او ُ‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫َمخَ ا َف ِان‬ ‫‪A6‬‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َمخَ ا ٌ‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫ف‬‫َمخَ ا ِو ُ‬ ‫ِمخْ َو َف ِان‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ِمخْ َو ٌ‬
‫ِف‬‫َمخَ او ُ‬ ‫ِمخْ َو َف َت ِان‬ ‫ِمخْ َو َف ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫ِيف‬
‫َمخَ او ُ‬ ‫ِمخْ َوا َف ِان‬ ‫ِمخْ َو ٌ‬
‫اف‬
‫‪A5. If there is a wāw madmūmah or a yà maksūrah preceded by a ḥarf sākin, then the ḥarakah will be given to the preceding letter.‬‬
‫‪A6.‬‬ ‫‪That wāw or yà maftūḥah which is preceded by a ḥarf sākin will have fatḥah given to the preceding letter and be changed to an àlif‬‬
‫‪A7.‬‬ ‫‪That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamzah‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪42‬‬
‫الْخَ ْوفُ‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْج َوف – ‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF ÀJWAF‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪43‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

RULES OF NĀQIṢ – ‫ال َّناقِص‬

MU’TAL LĀM – ‫ٌم ْع َتل ال َّلام‬

NĀQIṢ ‫ النَّاقِص‬IS A WORD WITH A ḤARF UL ‘ILLAH ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬AS ITS LĀM KALIMAH ‫ َلأ ُم الْ َكلِ َمة‬. IT WILL BE CLASSIFIED
AS WĀWĪ ‫ي‬ ّ ‫ النَّاقِص ال َوا ِو‬OR YĀ`Ī ‫ الْ َيائِ ّي‬DEPENDING ON THE ḤARF UL ‘ILLAH ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬IT CONTAINS.

N1. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬that is at the end of the kalimah ‫ َكلِ َمة‬and preceded by a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬changes to
a yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬

‫ُد ِع َي‬ ←
rule N1
‫ُد ِع َو‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬at the end of the kalimah
‫َر ِض َي‬ ←
rule N1
‫َر ِض َو‬ preceded by a kasrah

N2. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a
ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬that does not correspond to it, changes to a yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬, then the yà ‫ َياء‬turns to an
àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬when it is preceded by a fatḥah ‫فَت َْحة‬

‫ُي ْد َعا‬ ←
rule A1
‫ُي ْد َع ُي‬ ←
rule N2
‫ُي ْد َع ُو‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬in the fourth position preceded
‫ُي ْر َضى‬ ←
rule A1
‫ُي ْر َض ُي‬ ←
rule N2
‫ُي ْر َض ُو‬ by a ḥarakah not corresponding to it

N3. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬or yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬that takes place in the lām kalimah ‫ َلأ ُم الْ َكلِ َمة‬on the wazn ‫ َوزْن‬of
‘‫( ’ َي ْف َع ُل‬yaf’alu), and which is preceded by a dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬or a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬is made sākin ‫َسا ِكن‬
‫َت ْد ُع ْو‬ ←
rule N3
‫َت ْد ُع ُو‬ ‫اَ ْر ِم ْي‬ ←
rule N3
‫اَ ْر ِم ُي‬
wāw madmūmah ( ‫ ) و‬in the lām kalimah yà madmūmah ( ‫ ) ي‬in the lām kalimah
of ‘‫ ’ َي ْف َع ُل‬preceded by a dammah of ‘‫ ’ َي ْف َع ُل‬preceded by a kasrah

44
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

N4. The àlif ‫) ا ( اَلِف‬or wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬or yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm ‫َج ْزم‬

‫لَ ْم َي ْد ُع‬ ← ‫َي ْد ُع ْو‬

1

rule N4

‫لَ ْم َي ْر ِم‬ ← ‫َي ْر ِم ْي‬

2

rule N4

َ ْ‫لَ ْم َيخ‬
‫ش‬ ← ‫َيخْ شَ ى‬
3

rule N4

The àlif ( ‫) ا‬or wāw ( ‫ ) و‬or yà ( ‫) ي‬

appearing at the end in a condition of jazm

N5. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il ‫ اِ ْسم الْ َف ِاعل‬and is preceded by a kasrah
‫ ك َْس َرة‬changes to a yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬, then drops.

‫َدا ٍع‬ ←
rule A9
‫َد ِاع ٌي‬ ←
rule N5
‫َد ِاع ٌو‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬at the end of an ism fā’il
preceded by a kasrah

The same rule applies if a yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬takes place at then end of an ism fā’il ‫َاعل‬
ِ ‫اِ ْسم الْف‬.

‫َرا ٍم‬ ←
rule A9
‫َر ِام ٌي‬ yà ( ‫ ) ي‬at the end of an ism fā’il
preceded by a kasrah

N6. When wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬or yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬join with the first being sākin ‫سا ِكن‬,
َ then the wāw ‫ َواو‬changes to
yà ‫ َياء‬and ìdghām ‫ اِ ْدغَام‬is made between the two yà ‫ َياء‬, and a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬is given to the
preceding letter

idghām is made between the 2 yà ( ‫)ي‬

and a kasrah is given to the preceding
letter
‫َم ْر ِمي‬ ← ‫َم ْر ُم ْي ٌي‬ ← ‫َم ْر ُم ْو ٌي‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬and yà ( ‫ ) ي‬joining with the
first being sakin

wāw ( ‫ ) و‬is changed to yà ( ‫) ي‬

45
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

N7. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬that takes place at the end of an ism ‫اِ ْسم‬, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm
َ then that dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬is changed to kasrah ‫ك َْس َرة‬, wāw ‫ َواو‬is changed to yà ‫ َياء‬, yà ‫َياء‬
‫ح ْرف َمضْ ُموم‬,
becomes sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬and drops

‫َت َلق‬ ← ‫َت َل ِّق ْي‬ ← ‫َت َل ِّق ٌي‬ ←

rule N5
‫َت َل ِّق ٌو‬ ←
rule N6
‫َت َلق ٌو‬
wāw ( ‫ ) و‬at the end of an ism
preceded by a ḥarf madmūm

that dammah changes to kasrah

N8. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬appearing after a dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬followed by another wāw ‫واو‬,َ or the yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬
appearing after a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬followed by another yà ‫ َياء‬, are made sākin ‫سا ِكن‬,
َ then drop due to
ِ
ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫الساك َن ْين‬ ِ ِ
َّ ‫ا ْجت َماع‬

‫َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْر ِم ْي ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْر ِميِ ْي َن‬

‫ ) ي‬after kasrah followed by
← ←
1 yà (

another yà ( ‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 1

rule A9 rule N8

wāw ( ‫ ) و‬after dammah followed

‫َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ← ‫َي ْد ُع ْو ْو َن‬ ← ‫َي ْد ُع ُو ْو َن‬
2

rule A9 rule N8 by another wāw ( ‫ ) و‬in e.g. 2

N9. The wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬appearing after a dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬followed by a yà ‫ َياء‬, or the yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬appearing
after a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬followed by a wāw ‫واو‬,َ give their harakah to the preceding letter after it is
made sākin ‫سا ِكن‬,
َ then the wāw ‫ َواو‬is changed to yà ‫ َياء‬, or the yà ‫ َياء‬to wāw ‫واو‬,َ and then drop due
to ijtemā’ as sākinayn ‫السا ِك َن ْين‬
َّ ‫اِ ْجتِ َماع‬
wāw ( ‫ ) و‬after dammah followed by a yà ( ‫) ي‬

‫َت ْد ِع ْي َن‬ ←
rule A9
‫َت ْد ِع ْي ْي َن‬ ←
rule M3
‫َت ْد ِع ْو ْي َن‬ ←
rule A5
‫َت ْد ْع ِو ْي َن‬ ←
rule N9
‫َت ْد ُع ِو ْي َن‬
‫َي ْر ُم ْو َن‬ ←
rule A9
‫َي ْر ُم ْو ْو َن‬ ←
rule M3
‫َي ْر ُم ْي ْو َن‬ ←
rule A5
‫َي ْر ْم ُي ْو َن‬ ←
rule N9
‫َي ْر ِم ُي ْو َن‬
yà ( ‫ ) ي‬after kasrah followed by a wāw ( ‫) و‬

46
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪RULES OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪47‬‬
‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫) ال َّد ْع َو ُة ( النَّاقِص‬

‫ – ال َّد ْع َو ُة (ن) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬to invite

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
N2‫لَ ْن ُي ْد َعا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْد ُع َو‬ N2‫ُي ْد َعا‬ N3 ‫َي ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫ُد ِع َي‬
N1 ‫َد َعا‬
A1 ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُي ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫ُي ْد َع َي ِان‬

N2 ‫َي ْد ُع َو ِان‬ ‫ُد ِع َيا‬
N1 ‫َد َع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

N2,A9 ‫لَ ْن ُي ْد َع ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْد ُع ْوا‬

N8 N2,A9 ‫ُي ْد َع ْو َن‬ N8‫َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫ُد ُع ْوا‬
N1,N9 A1,A9‫َد َع ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َعا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع َو‬ N2‫تُ ْد َعا‬ N3 ‫َت ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫ُد ِع َي ْت‬
N1 A1,A9‫َد َع ْت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫تُ ْد َع َي ِان‬

N2 ‫َت ْد ُع َو ِان‬ ‫ُد ِع َي َتا‬
N1 A1,A9 ‫َد َع َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

N2‫لَ ْن َي ْد ُع ْو َن لَ ْن ُي ْد َع ْي َن‬ N2‫ُي ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ َ ‫ُد ِع‬

‫ين‬ N1 ‫َد َع ْو َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َعا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع َو‬ N2‫ُت ْد َعا‬ N3 ‫َت ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫يت‬ َ ‫ُد ِع‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْو َت‬ ِ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫تُ ْد َع َي ِان‬

N2 ‫َت ْد ُع َو ِان‬ ‫ُد ِعي ُت َما‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْوتُ َما‬ ِ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

N2,A9 ‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َع ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع ْوا‬

N8 N2,A9 ‫تُ ْد َع ْو َن‬ N8‫َت ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫ُد ِعي ُت ْم‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْوتُ ْم‬ ِ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

N2,A9 ‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َعي‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ِع ْي‬

N9 N2,A9 ‫تُ ْد َع ْي َن‬ N9 ‫َت ْد ِع ْي َن‬ ‫يت‬ ِ ‫ُد ِع‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْو ِت‬ ِ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

N2‫لَ ْن ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫تُ ْد َع َي ِان‬

N2 ‫َت ْد ُع َو ِان‬ ‫ُد ِعي ُت َما‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْوتُ َما‬ ِ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

N2‫لَ ْن َت ْد ُع ْو َن لَ ْن ُت ْد َع ْي َن‬ N2‫تُ ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫ُد ِعي ُت َّن‬

N1 ‫َد َع ْو ُت َّن‬ ِ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن اُ ْد َعا‬
N2 ‫لَ ْن َا ْد ُع َو‬ N2 ‫اُ ْد َعا‬ N3 ‫اَ ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫يت‬ ُ ‫ُد ِع‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْو ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

N2‫لَ ْن نُ ْد َعا‬ ‫لَ ْن َن ْد ُع َو‬ N2‫نُ ْد َعا‬ N3 ‫َن ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫ُد ِعي َنا‬
N1 ‫َد َع ْونَا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

N1. The wāw that is at the end of the kalimah and preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà
N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to
a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah
N3. The wāw or yà that takes place in the lām kalimah on the wazn of ‘‫’ َي ْف َع ُل‬, and which is preceded by a dammah or a kasrah is made sākin
N8. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by another wāw is made sākin, then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn
N9. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by a yà, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the wāw is
changed to yà, and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn
A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
48
‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة (ن) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َي ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َل َي ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْد َع ْوا‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْد ُع ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫َل َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َل َت ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع ْوا‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ِع ْن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ِع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع ْي‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ِع ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َت ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َن ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َل َن ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم نُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نَ ْد ُع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by another wāw is made sākin, then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by a yà, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the wāw is‬‬
‫‪changed to yà, and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪49‬‬
‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة (ن) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي ْد َع َي ْن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫لِ ُي ْد َع‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع‬
‫‪N4‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع ْو‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َت ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫لِ َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫لِ َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ْو‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ِع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ِع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ْي‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اُ ْد ِع ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫اُ ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َن ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َن ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْد ُع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by another wāw is made sākin, then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by a yà, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the wāw is‬‬
‫‪changed to yà, and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪50‬‬
‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة (ن) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْد َع َي ْن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع‬
‫‪N4‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع َيا‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع ْو‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ْو‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع ْو‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ِع ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ِع َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ْي‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ِع ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع َوا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع ْونَا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْد َع ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْد ُع ْو َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْد ُع‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْد َع َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َن ْد ُع َو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْد َع َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َن ْد ُع َو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْد َع‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ْد ُع‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by another wāw is made sākin, then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The wāw appearing after a dammah followed by a yà, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the wāw is‬‬
‫‪changed to yà, and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ FIRST EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

‫ال َّد ْع َو ُة (ن) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N2 ٌ ‫َدا ِع َي‬
‫ات‬ N2 ‫َدا ِع َي َت ِان‬ N2 ‫َدا ِع َي ٌة‬ N2,N9 ‫َدا ُعو َن‬ N2 ‫َدا ِع َي ِان‬ N2,N5 ‫َدا ٍع‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
I1 ٌ ‫َم ْد ُع َّو‬
‫ات‬ I1 ‫َم ْد ُع َّوت َِان‬ I1 ‫َم ْد ُع َّو ٌة‬ I1 ‫َم ْد ُعوو َن‬ I1 ‫َم ْد ُع َّو ِان‬ I1 ‫َم ْد ُعو‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N2,N7 ‫ُدع ًى‬ N2 ‫ات‬

ٌ ‫ُد ْع َي َي‬ N2 ‫ُد ْع َي َي ِان‬ N2 ‫ُد ْع َيى‬ N2,N7 ‫اَ َدا ٍع‬ N2,A9 ‫اَ ْد َع ْو َن‬ N2 ‫اَ ْد َع َي ِان‬ N2 ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل اَ ْد َعى‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

N2,N7 ‫َمدَا ٍع‬ N2 ‫َم ْد َع َي ِان‬ N2,N7 ‫َم ْد ًعى‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
N2,N7 ‫َمدَا ٍع‬ N2 ‫ِم ْد َع َي ِان‬ N2,N7 ‫ِم ْد ًعى‬
N2,N7 ‫َمدَا ٍع‬ N2 , ‫ِم ْد َع َي َت ِان‬ N2 ‫ِم ْد َعا ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
N2 ‫َمدَا ِعي‬ N2 ‫ِم ْد َعا َي ِان‬ N2,A7 ‫ِم ْد َعا ٌء‬
A7. That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamza
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to
a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah
N5. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il and is preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà, then drops. The same rule applies if a
yà takes place at then end of an ism fā’il.
N7. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm, then that dammah is changed to kasrah, wāw is
changed to a yà, the yà becomes sākin and drops
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn
I1. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters are the same or qarīb makhraj and appear side by side, then the first is made sākin and then
mudgham into the second

52
‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫) ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن ( النَّاقِص – ̣‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫‪ – to be pleased‬ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن (س) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َضى‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر َضى‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫ُي ْر َضى‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َي ْر َضى‬ ‫ُر ِض َي‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫‪N1‬‬‫َر ِض َي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر َض َيا‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫ُي ْر َض َي ِان‬ ‫َي ْر َض َي ِان‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫ُر ِض َيا‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر َض ْوا‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫ُي ْر َض ْو َن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َي ْر َض ْو َن‬ ‫ُر ُض ْوا‬
‫‪N1,N9‬‬ ‫‪N1,N9‬‬ ‫َر ُض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َضى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َضى‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫تُ ْر َضى‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َت ْر َضى‬ ‫ُر ِض َي ْت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض َي ْت‬
‫‪N1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض َيا‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫تُ ْر َض َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر َض َي ِان‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫ُر ِض َي َتا‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫‪N1‬‬‫َر ِض َي َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر َض ْي َن‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫ُي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي َن‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫‪N1‬‬‫َر ِض ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َضى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َضى‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫تُ ْر َضى‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َت ْر َضى‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي َت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي َت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض َيا‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫ُت ْر َض َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر َض َي ِان‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ُت َما‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ُت َما‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض ْوا‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َض ْو َن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َت ْر َض ْو َن‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ُت ْم‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ُت ْم‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َض ْي‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض ْي‬

‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َت ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ِت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ِت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض َيا‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫تُ ْر َض َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر َض َي ِان‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ُت َما‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ُت َما‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر َض ْي َن‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫تُ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َت ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ُت َّن‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ُت َّن‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُا ْر َضى‬ ‫لَ ْن َا ْر َضى‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫اُ ْر َضى‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫اَ ْر َضى‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي ُت‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫َر ِض ْي ُت‬
‫‪N1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نُ ْر َضى‬ ‫لَ ْن نَ ْر َضى‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫نُ ْر َضى‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫نَ ْر َضى‬ ‫ُر ِض ْي َنا‬
‫‪N1‬‬ ‫‪N1‬‬‫َر ِض ْي َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N1. The wāw that is at the end of the kalimah and preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà‬‬
‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪53‬‬
‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن (س) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬
‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ َي ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم َي ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل َي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل َي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل َي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم ُت ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم َت ْر َ‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض ْي‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َل َت ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم اُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لَ ْم اَ ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َن ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لَ َن ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لَ ْم نَ ْر َ‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪54‬‬
‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن (س) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪N2‬‬‫لِ ُي ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫لِ َي ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض َي َّن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬‫ض‬‫لِ ُي ْر َ‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َ‬
‫‪N2,N4‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لِ َت ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لِ ُت ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫اِ ْر َ‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ْي‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫اِ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫ل ِأ َ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬
‫لِأ ُ ْر َ‬
‫ض‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫لِأ َ ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫لِ ُن ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬
‫لِ َن ْر َ‬
‫ض‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪55‬‬
‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن (س) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْر َض َي ْن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض َي ْن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬‫َلأ ُي ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض َي َّن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ ُي ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ َي ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض َيا ِّن‬
‫‪N2‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ تُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ َت ْر َ‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ْي‬ ‫‪N2,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض َيا‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر َض ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُا ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ َا ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬
‫َلأ اُ ْر َ‬
‫ض‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬
‫َلأ اَ ْر َ‬
‫ض‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ْر َض َي ْن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ْر َض َي َّن‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ نُ ْر َ‬ ‫‪N2,N4‬‬ ‫ض‬‫َلأ نَ ْر َ‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪56‬‬
‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ SECOND EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

‫ال ِّرضْ َوا ُن (س) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َو ِّاو ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N2 ‫ات‬
ٌ ‫اض َي‬ِ ‫َر‬ N2 ‫اض َي َت ِان‬ِ ‫َر‬ N2
ِ ‫َر‬
‫اض َي ٌة‬ N2,N9 ‫اضو َن‬
ُ ‫َر‬ N2 ‫اض َي ِان‬ ِ ‫َر‬ N2,N5 ‫ض‬
ٍ ‫َرا‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
N6 ٌ ‫َم ْر ِض َّي‬
‫ات‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِض ّي َت ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِض َّي ٌة‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِضيو َن‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِض َّي ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِضي‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N2,N7 ‫ُر ًضى‬ N2 ‫ات‬

ٌ ‫ُرضْ َي َي‬ N2 ‫ُرضْ َي َي ِان‬ N2 ‫ُرضْ َيى‬ N7 ٍ ‫اَ َرا‬
‫ض‬ N2,A9 ‫اَ ْر َض ْو َن‬ N2 ‫اَ ْر َض َي ِان‬ N2 ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل اَ ْر َضى‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

N2,N7 ‫ض‬
ٍ ‫َم َرا‬ N2 ‫َم ْر َض َي ِان‬ N2,N7 ‫َم ْر ًضى‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
N2,N7 ‫ض‬ٍ ‫َم َرا‬ N2 ‫ِم ْر َض َي ِان‬ N2,N7 ‫ِم ْر ًضى‬
N2,N7 ‫ض‬ ٍ ‫َم َرا‬ N2 ‫ِم ْر َضات َِان‬ N2 ‫ِم ْر َضا ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
N2 ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫َم َر‬ N2 ‫ِم ْر َضا َي ِان‬ N2,A7 ‫ِم ْر َضا ٌء‬
A7. That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamza
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to
a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah
N5. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il and is preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà, then drops. The same rule applies if a
yà takes place at then end of an ism fā’il.
N6. When wāw or yà join with the first being sākin, then the wāw changes to yà and ìdghām is made between the two yà, and a kasrah is
given to the preceding letter
N7. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm, then that dammah is changed to kasrah, wāw is
changed to a yà, the yà becomes sākin and drops
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn

57
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫) ال َّر ْم ُي ( النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫‪ – to throw‬ال َّر ْم ُي (ض) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َيائِ ّي‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َمى‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫ُي ْر َمى‬ ‫‪N3‬‬ ‫َي ْر ِمي‬ ‫ُر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫َر َمى‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫ُي ْر َم َي ِان‬ ‫َي ْر ِم َي ِان‬ ‫ُر ِم َيا‬ ‫َر َم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫ُي ْر َم ْو َن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َي ْر ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُر ُم ْوا‬
‫‪N9‬‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َر َم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َمى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َمى‬ ‫‪N3‬‬ ‫َت ْر ِمي‬ ‫ُر ِم َي ْت‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َر َم ْت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫تُ ْر َم َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر ِم َي ِان‬ ‫ُر ِم َي َتا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َر َم َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫ُي ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫َي ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َر َم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َمى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َمى‬ ‫‪N3‬‬ ‫َت ْر ِمي‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي َت‬ ‫َر َم ْي َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫ُت ْر َم َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر ِم َي ِان‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َر َم ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9,‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َم ْو َن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َت ْر ُم ْو َن‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َر َم ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َم ْي‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ِت‬ ‫َر َم ْي ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫تُ ْر َم َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْر ِم َي ِان‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َر َم ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫تُ ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َر َم ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن اُ ْر َمى‬ ‫لَ ْن اَ ْر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫اُ ْر َمى‬ ‫‪N3‬‬ ‫اَ ْر ِمي‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي ُت‬ ‫َر َم ْي ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نُ ْر َمى‬ ‫لَ ْن نَ ْر ِم َي‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫نُ ْر َمى‬ ‫‪N3‬‬ ‫نَ ْر ِمي‬ ‫ُر ِم ْي َنا‬ ‫َر َم ْي َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪َ ’, and which is preceded by a dammah or a kasrah is made sākin‬ي ْف َع ُل‘ ‪N3. The wāw or yà that takes place in the lām kalimah on the wazn of‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪58‬‬
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّر ْم ُي (ض) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َيائِ ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ُي ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َي ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َل ُت ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َل ُت ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َي ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َم ْي‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َت ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ ُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لَ ُن ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َن ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُن ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َن ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نَ ْر ِم‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪59‬‬
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّر ْم ُي (ض) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َيائِ ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬‫لِ ُي ْر َم‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم‬
‫‪N4‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َت ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا‬ ‫لِ َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫لِ َي ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ْي‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم َيا‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫اِ ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِأ ُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لِ ُن ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َن ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُن ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َن ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْر ِم‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪60‬‬
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫ال َّر ْم ُي (ض) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َيائِ ّي‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬‫َلأ ُي ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم َيا‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ُم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ُم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ْوا‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ُم ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ِي ْن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ِي َّن‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ْي‬ ‫‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْر َم ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْر ِم ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ اُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُا ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْر ِم‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫َلأ نُ ْر َم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ نَ ْر ِم َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْر َم َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ نَ ْر ِم َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْر َم‬ ‫‪N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نَ ْر ِم‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9.‬‬ ‫‪Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬

‫‪61‬‬
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIṢ – ‫النَّاقِص‬

‫ال َّر ْم ُي (ض) – ال َّنا ِقص الْ َيائِ ّي‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

ٌ ‫َرا ِم َي‬
‫ات‬ ‫َرا ِم َي َت ِان‬ ‫َرا ِم َي ٌة‬ N9 ‫َرا ُمو َن‬ ‫َرا ِم َي ِان‬ N5 ‫َرا ٍم‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
N6 ٌ ‫َم ْر ِم َّي‬
‫ات‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِم َّي َت ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِم َّي ٌة‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِميو َن‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِم َّي ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْر ِمي‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N7 ‫ُر ًمى‬ ‫ات‬

ٌ ‫ُر ْم َي َي‬ ‫ُر ْم َي َي ِان‬ ‫ُر ْم َيى‬ N7 ‫اَ َرا ٍم‬ A1,A9 ‫اَ ْر َم ْو َن‬ ‫اَ ْر َم َي ِان‬ A1 ‫اَ ْر َمى‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

N7‫َم َرا ٍم‬ ‫َم ْر َم َي ِان‬ N7 ‫َم ْر ًمى‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
N7‫َم َرا ٍم‬ ‫ِم ْر َم َي ِان‬ N7 ‫ِم ْر ًمى‬
N7‫َم َرا ٍم‬ A1 ‫ِم ْر َمات َِان‬ A1 ‫ِم ْر َما ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َرا ِمي‬ ‫ِم ْر َما َي ِان‬ A7 ‫ِم ْر َما ٌء‬
A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif
A7. That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamza
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N5. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il and is preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà, then drops. The same rule applies if a
yà takes place at then end of an ism fā’il.
N6. When wāw or yà join with the first being sākin, then the wāw changes to yà and ìdghām is made between the two yà, and a kasrah is
given to the preceding letter
N7. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm, then that dammah is changed to kasrah, wāw is
changed to a yà, the yà becomes sākin and drops
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn

62
‫ال َّر ْم ُي‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫النَّاقِص – ̣‪THIRD EXAMPLE OF NĀQIS‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪63‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF LAFĪF – ‫لَ ِفيف‬

RULES OF LAFĪF – ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬

Verbs containing two ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬are called lafīf1 ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬. There are two types of lafīf ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬:
1. lafīf mafrūq2 ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق‬
2. lafīf maqrūn3 ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون‬

LAFĪF MAFRŪQ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

Lafīf mafrūq ‫ اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروف‬is where the ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬fall on the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الْ َك ِل َمة‬and the lām
kalimah ‫ َلأ ُم الْ َكلِ َمة‬.

The rules of mithāl ‫ الْ ِمثَال‬and nāqiṣ ‫ النَّاقِص‬must be applied to these verbs.

‫َق‬
rules of mithāl ‫ الْ ِمثَال‬apply on the wāw ‫) ( َواو‬

rules of nāqiṣ ‫ النَّاقِص‬apply on the yà ‫( َياء‬ )

LAFĪF MAQRŪN ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

Lafīf maqrūn ‫ اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون‬is where the ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬fall on the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬and the lām
kalimah ‫ َلأ ُم الْ َكلِ َمة‬.

The ḥarf ‘illah ‫ ًح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬falling on the ‘ayn kalimah ‫ َع ْي ُن الْ َكلِ َمة‬acts as a ṣaḥīḥ
‫ َص ِحيح‬letter, so only the rules of nāqiṣ ‫ النَّاقِص‬must be applied to these verbs.

‫َق ِو‬
rules of nāqiṣ ‫ النَّاقِص‬apply on the yà ‫( َياء‬ )

1 lafīf ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬literally means ‘wrapped’. The verb which is lafīf ‫اللَّ ِفيف‬is wrapped in two ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬
2 mafrūq ‫ َم ْف ُروق‬means ‘separated’. This refers to the two ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ ُح ُروف الْ ِعلَّة‬that are placed separately in the word.
3 maqrūn ‫ م ْقرون‬means ‘joined’. This refers to the two ḥurūf ‘illah ‫ حروف الْ ِعلَّة‬that are joined in the word.
ُ َ ُُ
64
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫لَ ِفيف – ‪RULES OF LAFĪF‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪65‬‬
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ‬‬

‫) الْ ِوقَا َي ُة ( اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ‬‬

‫‪ – to protect‬الْ ِو َقا َي ُة (ض) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َقى‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِق َي‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫ُي ْو َقا‬ ‫‪M1,N3‬‬ ‫َي ِقي‬ ‫ُو ِق َي‬ ‫َو َقا‬
‫‪A1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َق َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِق َيا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َق َي ِان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َي ِق َيا ِن‬ ‫ُو ِق َيا‬ ‫َو َق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َق ْوا‬‫‪M1,N9‬‬‫لَ ْن َي ُق ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َق ْو َن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َي ُق ْو َن‬ ‫ُوقُ ْوا‬
‫‪N9‬‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َو َق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َقى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق َي‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫تُ ْو َقا‬ ‫‪M1,N3‬‬ ‫َت ِقي‬ ‫ُو ِق َي ْت‬ ‫َو َق ْت‬
‫‪A1,A9‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق َيا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َق َي ِان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َت ِق َي ِان‬ ‫ُو ِق َي َتا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬‫َو َق َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ِق ْي َن‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُي ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َي ِق ْي َن‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َو َق ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َقى‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق َي‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫تُ ْو َقا‬ ‫‪M1,N3‬‬ ‫َت ِقي‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي َت‬ ‫َو َق ْي َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْو َق َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق َيا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫ُت ْو َق َي ِان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َت ِق َي ِان‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َو َق ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َق ْوا‬‫‪M1,N9‬‬‫لَ ْن َت ُق ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َق ْو َن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َت ُق ْو َن‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َو َق ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َق ْي‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬‫لَ ْن َت ِق ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫َت ِق ْي َن‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ِت‬ ‫َو َق ْي ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق َيا‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َق َي ِان‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َت ِق َي ِان‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َو َق ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ِق ْي َن‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫تُ ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬‫َت ِق ْي َن‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َو َق ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن اُ ْو َقى‬ ‫لَ ْن اَ ِق َي‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫اُ ْو َقا‬ ‫‪M1,N3‬‬ ‫اَ ِقي‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي ُت‬ ‫َو َق ْي ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نُ ْو َقى‬ ‫لَ ْن نَ ِق َي‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫نُ ْو َقا‬ ‫‪M1,N3‬‬ ‫نَ ِقي‬ ‫ُو ِق ْي َنا‬ ‫َو َق ْي َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop.‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪َ ’, and which is preceded by a dammah or a kasrah is made sākin‬ي ْف َع ُل‘ ‪N3. The wāw or yà that takes place in the lām kalimah on the wazn of‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬

‫‪66‬‬
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ‬‬

‫الْ ِو َقا َي ُة (ض) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصي َغة‬
‫لَ ُي ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َي ِق َي ْن‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َي ِق َي َّن‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َيقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َي ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫لَ َيق ُْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْو َق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َل َي ُق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْو َق ْوا‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تَقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل َي ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تَقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َل َتق ُْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َل َت ُق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َق ْوا‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْو َق ِي ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْو َق ِي َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْم تُ ْو َق ْي‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ِق ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َت ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم تُ ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ ُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ِق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ِق‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لَ ُن ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َن ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُن ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫لَ َن ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم نُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم نَقِ‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ – ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق‬

‫الْ ِو َقا َي ُة (ض) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ِ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن‬ ِ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي ْو َق َي ْن‬ M1 ‫لِ َي ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َي ِق َي َّن‬
M1 ‫لِ ُي ْو َق‬
A1,N4 M1,N4 ِ‫لِ َيق‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

- - ‫لِ ُي ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ِق َيا ِّن‬

M1 ‫لِ ُي ْو َق َيا‬ M1 ‫لِ َي ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

N8* ‫لِ ُي ْو َق ُو ْن‬ M1,N9 ‫لِ َيق ُْن‬ N8* ‫لِ ُي ْو َق ُو َّن‬ M1,N9 ‫لِ َي ُق َّن‬ A1,A9 ‫لِ ُي ْو َق ْوا‬ M1,N9 ‫لِ َي ُق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َق َي ْن‬ M1 ‫لِ َت ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َي َّن‬ M1 ‫لِ َت ِق َي َّن‬ A1,N4 ‫لِ ُت ْو َق‬ M1,N4 ِ‫لِ َتق‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

- - ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ M1 ‫لِ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا‬ M1 ‫لِ َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

- - ‫لِ ُي ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ M1 ‫لِ َي ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْو َق ْي َن‬ M1 ‫لِ َي ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْو َق َي ْن‬ M1 ‫ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َي َّن‬ M1 ‫ِق َي َّن‬ A1,N4 ‫لِ ُت ْو َق‬ M1,N4 ‫ِق‬ ِ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

- - ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ M1 ‫ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا‬ M1 ‫ِق َيا‬ ِ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

N8* ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ُو ْن‬ M1,N9 ‫ُق ْن‬ N8* ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ُو َّن‬ M1,N9 ‫ُق َّن‬ A1,A9 ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ْوا‬ M1,N9 ‫قُ ْوا‬ ِ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح‬
‫اضر‬

N8* ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ِي ْن‬ M1,N8 ‫ِق ْن‬ N8* ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ِي َّن‬ M1,N8 ‫ِق َّن‬ A1,A9 ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ْي‬ M1,N8 ‫ِق ْي‬ ِ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

- - ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ M1 ‫ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق َيا‬ M1 ‫ِق َيا‬ ِ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

- - ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ M1 ‫ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْو َق ْي َن‬ M1 ‫ِق ْي َن‬ ِ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِأ ُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ M1 ‫لِأ َ ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ M1 ‫لِأ َ ِق َي َّن‬ A1,N4 َ‫لِأ ُ ْوق‬ M1,N4 ‫لِأ َ ِق‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لِ ُن ْو َق َي ْن‬ M1 ‫لِ َن ِق َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُن ْو َق َي َّن‬ M1 ‫لِ َن ِق َي َّن‬ A1,N4 ‫لِ ُن ْو َق‬ M1,N4 ِ‫لِ َنق‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop
A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to
a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah
N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm
N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn
68
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ‬‬

‫الْ ِو َقا َي ُة (ض) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق َي ْن‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق َي َّن‬
‫‪M1‬‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َيقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق َيا ِّن‬

‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق َيا‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق َيا‬
‫‪M1‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َيق ُْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق ْوا‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تَقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ تَقِ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َتق ُْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ْوا‬ ‫‪M1,N9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُق ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ِي ْن‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق ْن‬ ‫*‪N8‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ِي َّن‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ْي‬ ‫‪M1,N8‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْو َق َيا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْو َق َيا‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ تُ ْو َق ْي َن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ِق ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ اُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ِق‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫َلأ نُ ْو َق َي ْن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ِق َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْو َق َي َّن‬ ‫‪M1‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ِق َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْوقَ‬ ‫‪M1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نَقِ‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪M1. That wāw sākin which appears between an ‘alamat al mudari’ maftuḥah and kasrah will drop‬‬
‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N2. The wāw which appears in the third, fourth, or higher position, and is preceded by a ḥarakah that does not correspond to it, changes to‬‬
‫‪a yà, then the yà turns to an àlif when it is preceded by a fatḥah‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬
‫‪N8. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by another yà, are made sākin, then drop due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ – ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق‬

‫الْ ِو َقا َي ُة (ض) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْف ُروق‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

ٌ ‫َوا ِق َي‬
‫ات‬ ‫َوا ِق َي َت ِان‬ ‫َوا ِق َي ٌة‬ N9 ‫َواقُو َن‬ ‫َوا ِق َي ِان‬ N5
ٍ ‫َو‬
‫اق‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
N6 ٌ ‫َم ْو ِق َّي‬
‫ات‬ N6‫َم ْو ِق َّي َت ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْو ِق َّي ٌة‬ N6 ‫َم ْو ِقيو َن‬ N6 ‫َم ْو ِق َّي ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْو ِقي‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N7 ‫ُو ًقى‬ ٌ ‫ُو ْق َي َي‬

‫ات‬ ‫ُو ْق َي َي ِان‬ ‫ُو ْق َيى‬ N7
ٍ ‫اَ َو‬
‫اق‬ A1,A9 ‫اَ ْو َق ْو َن‬ ‫اَ ْو َق َي ِان‬ A1 ‫اَ ْو َقى‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫اق‬
N7
ٍ ‫َم َو‬ ‫َم ْو َق َي ِان‬ N7 ‫َم ْو ًقى‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫اق‬
N7
ٍ ‫َم َو‬ ‫ِم ْيق ََي ِان‬ N7 ‫ِم ْي ًقى‬
‫اق‬
N7
ٍ ‫َم َو‬ A1 ‫ِم ْي َقات َِان‬ A1 ‫ِم ْي َقا ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َوا ِقي‬ ‫ِم ْيقَا َي ِان‬ A7 ‫ِم ْيقَا ٌء‬
A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif
A7. That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamza
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N5. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il and is preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà, then drops. The same rule applies if a
yà takes place at then end of an ism fā’il.
N6. When wāw or yà join with the first being sākin, then the wāw changes to yà and ìdghām is made between the two yà, and a kasrah is
given to the preceding letter
N7. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm, then that dammah is changed to kasrah, wāw is
changed to a yà, the yà becomes sākin and drops
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn

70
‫الْ ِوقَا َي ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمف ُْروق – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAFRŪQ‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪71‬‬
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫) الْ ُق َّو ُة ( اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫‪ – to be strong‬الْ ُق َّو ُة (س) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫اضي‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫لَ ْن َي ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫ُي ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َي ْق َوى‬ ‫ِي‬‫قُو َ‬ ‫ِي‬‫َقو َ‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫ُي ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫َي ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ِو َيا‬ ‫َق ِو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْن ُي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َل ْن َي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫ُي ْق َو ْو َن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َي ْق َو ْو َن‬ ‫قُ ُو ْوا‬
‫‪N9‬‬ ‫‪N9‬‬ ‫َق ُو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫لَ ْن َت ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫تُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْق َوى‬ ‫قُ ِو َي ْت‬ ‫َق ِو َي ْت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫تُ ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ِو َي َتا‬ ‫َق ِو َي َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬

‫َل ْن ُي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َل ْن َي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫ُي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي َن‬ ‫َق ِو ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫لَ ْن َت ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫تُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َت ْق َوى‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي َت‬ ‫َق ِو ْي َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫ُت ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن تُ ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْق َو ْو َن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َت ْق َو ْو َن‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫تُ ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ِت‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫تُ ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫َت ْق َو َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َل ْن تُ ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َل ْن َت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫تُ ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َل ْن ُا ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َل ْن َا ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫ُا ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫َا ْق َوى‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي ُت‬ ‫َق ِو ْي ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1‬‬ ‫لَ ْن نُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬‫لَ ْن نَ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫نُ ْق َوى‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫نَ ْق َوى‬ ‫قُ ِو ْي َنا‬ ‫َق ِو ْي َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,‬‬
‫‪and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn‬‬

‫‪72‬‬
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫الْ ُق َّو ُة (س) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْل ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لَ ُي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َل ُي َق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َل َي ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َل ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َل َت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم ُي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َل ْم َي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ُت ْق َويِ ْن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َويِ ْن‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لَ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َل ْم ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َت ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ ُ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لَ ُن ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ َن ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لَ ُن ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لَ َن ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َن ْق َو‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬

‫‪73‬‬
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫الْ ُق َّو ُة (س) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو‬
‫‪A1,N4‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫لِ َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫لِ َي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لِ ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫اِ ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫اِ ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫اِ ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫اِ ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِ ُت ْق َويِ ْن‬ ‫اِ ْق َويِ ْن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫اِ ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫اِ ْق َو ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫اِ ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫اِ ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لِأ ُ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لِأ َ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫لِ ُن ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ َن ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫لِ ُن ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫لِ َن ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْق َو‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N4. The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬

‫‪74‬‬
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫الْ ُق َّو ُة (س) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬‫َلأ ُي ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ ُي ْق ُو ْن‬
‫‪N0‬‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق ُو َّن‬
‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق ُو َّن‬
‫‪N0‬‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق ُو ْن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪N0‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق ُو َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ ُت ْق َو ِي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو ِي ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َويِ َّن‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫‪A1,A9‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو َيا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو ْي َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْق َو ْي َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َلأ اُ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْق َو‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫َلأ نُ ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ َن ْق َو َي ْن‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫َلأ َن ْق َو َي َّن‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْق َو‬ ‫‪A1,N4‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ْق َو‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif‬‬
‫‪A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops‬‬
‫‪N4.‬‬ ‫‪The àlif or wāw or yà that appear at the end drop in a condition of jazm‬‬

‫‪75‬‬
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN – ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون‬

‫الْ ُق َّو ُة (س) – اللَّ ِفيف الْ َم ْق ُرون‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

ٌ ‫َقا ِو َي‬
‫ات‬ ‫َقا ِو َي َت ِان‬ ‫َقا ِو َي ٌة‬ N9 ‫َق ُاوو َن‬ ‫َقا ِو َي ِان‬ N5 ‫َقا ٍو‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
N6 ٌ ‫َم ْق ِو َّي‬
‫ات‬ N6 ‫َم ْق ِو َّي َت ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْق ِو َّي ٌة‬ N6 ‫َم ْق ِويو َن‬ N6 ‫َم ْق ِو َّي ِان‬ N6 ‫َم ْق ِوي‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

N7 ‫قُ ًوى‬ ٌ ‫قُ ْو َي َي‬

‫ات‬ ‫قُ ْو َي َي ِان‬ ‫قُ ْو َيى‬ N7 ‫اَ َقا ٍو‬ A1,A9 ‫اَ ْق َو ْو َن‬ ‫اَ ْق َو َي ِان‬ A1 ‫اَ ْق َوى‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َمقَا ٍو‬
N7 ‫َم ْق َو َي ِان‬ N7 ‫َم ْق ًوى‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َمقَا ٍو‬
N7 ‫ِم ْق َو َي ِان‬ N7 ‫ِم ْق ًوى‬
‫َمقَا ٍو‬
N7 A1 ‫ِم ْق َوات َِان‬ A1 ‫ِم ْق َوا ٌة‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َمقَاوِي‬ ‫ِم ْق َوا َي ِان‬ A7 ‫ِم ْق َوا ٌء‬
A1. That wāw or yà mutaḥarrikah which is preceded by a ḥarf maftuḥ is changed to àlif
A7. That wāw or yà that appears after àlif zāìdah (not from the ḥuruf aṣliyah) will be changed to a hamza
A9. Usually when ijtemā’ as sākinayn takes place, the first ḥarf sākin drops
N5. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism fā’il and is preceded by a kasrah changes to a yà, then drops. The same rule applies if a
yà takes place at then end of an ism fā’il.
N6. When wāw or yà join with the first being sākin, then the wāw changes to yà and ìdghām is made between the two yà, and a kasrah is
given to the preceding letter
N7. The wāw that takes place at the end of an ism, and is preceded by a ḥarf madmūm, then that dammah is changed to kasrah, wāw is
changed to a yà, the yà becomes sākin and drops
N9. The yà appearing after a kasrah followed by a wāw, gives its ḥarakah to the preceding letter after it is made sākin, then the yà to wāw,
and then drops due to ijtemā’ as sākinayn

76
‫الْ ُق َّو ُة‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اللَّ ِفيف الْ َمق ُْرون – ‪EXAMPLE OF LAFĪF MAQRŪN‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪77‬‬
 ‫ خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬IMPORTANT FACTS FOR LEARNING MUDĀ’AF – ‫ُم َضا َعف‬

IMPORTANT FACTS FOR LEARNING MUDĀ’AF – ‫ضا َعف‬

َ ‫ُم‬
1. The changes that take place in mudā’af ‫ ُم َضا َعف‬are of three types:
َ ‫ َذ َب‬becomes ‫ذ ََّب‬
(1) ìdghām qiyāsī ‫ اِ ْدغَام قِ َي ِاس ّي‬like when ‫ب‬
َ becomes ‫َظ ْل ُت ْم‬
(2) ḥadhf simā’ī ‫( َح ْذف ِس َم ِاع ّي‬heard like this) like when ‫ظ َل ْل ُت ْم‬

ُ ‫ اَ ْم َل ْل‬becomes ‫اَ ْم َل ْي ُت‬

(3) ìbdāl simā’ī ‫( اِ ْبدَال ِس َم ِاعي‬heard like this) like when ‫ت‬

2. The letter being joined is called mudgham ‫ ُم ْدغَم‬and the letter being joined to is called
mudgham fīh ‫ُم ْدغَم فِيه‬

‫َذ َب‬
is the mudgham ‫ُم ْدغَم‬

‫ب‬ is the mudgham fīh ‫ُم ْدغَم فِيه‬

3. If the mudgham ‫ ُم ْدغَم‬and the mudgham fīh ‫ ُم ْدغَم فِيه‬are qarīb makhraj ‫ ًقرِيب الْ َمخْ َرج‬but not the same,
both will remain in writing and will sound like one letter in pronunciation.

read like

‫َو َج ْد ُت‬ →
← ‫َو َجت‬
written like

If the letters are the same, they will be written as one and will be pronounced with a tashdīd
‫تَشْ ِديد‬, which represents two separate letters.

4. When there are two qarīb makhraj ‫ ًقرِيب الْ َمخْ َرج‬letters with the first being sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬and the
second mutaḥarrik ‫ ُم َت َح ِّرك‬, then the second is changed to the first and idghām ‫ اِ ْدغَام‬is made.

‫اِ ِّد َع ٌاء‬ ← ‫اِ ْد ِد َع ٌاء‬ ← ‫اِ ْدتِ َع ٌاء‬

two qarīb makhraj letters with
the first being sākin and the
second mutaḥarrik

second is changed to the first

and idghām is made

78
 ‫ خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬IMPORTANT FACTS FOR LEARNING MUDĀ’AF – ‫ُم َضا َعف‬
5. If the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الْ َكلِ َمة‬of ‫( اِ ْفتِ َعال‬ifti’āl) is a dāl ‫( َدال‬ ‫) د‬, dhāl ‫) ذ ( ِذال‬, or zà ‫) ز ( َزاء‬, then the
tà ‫ ) ت ( َتاء‬of ‫( اِ ْف ِت َعال‬ifti’āl) becomes a dāl ‫( َدال‬ ‫)د‬

‫اِ ِّد َع ٌاء‬ ‫اِ ْدتِ َع ٌاء‬

1

← fà kalimah of ‫اِفْتِ َعال‬ is

‫ ) د‬in e.g. 1,
‫اِ ِّد َخا ٌر‬ ‫اِ ْذتِ َخا ٌر‬
2 dāl (

← dhāl ( ‫ ) ذ‬in e.g. 2

6. If the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الْ َكلِ َمة‬of ‫( اِ ْفتِ َعال‬ifti’āl) is from the ḥurūf ìṭbāq ‫ح ُروف اِ ْط َباق‬,
ُ then the tà ‫ ) ت ( َتاء‬of
‫( اِ ْف ِت َعال‬ifti’āl) becomes a dād ‫) ض ( َضاد‬

‫اِ ْص َط َل َح‬ ‫اِ ْص َت َل َح‬

1

← fà kalimah of ‫اِفْتِ َعال‬ is

‫ )ص‬in e.g. 1,
ṣād (

‫اِضْ َط َر َب‬ ‫اِضْ َت َر َب‬

2

← dād (‫ )ض‬in e.g. 2

Note: the ḥurūf ìṭbāq ‫ ُح ُروف اِ ْط َباق‬are ṣād ‫) ص ( َصاد‬, dād ‫) ض ( َضاد‬, ṭà ‫ ) ط ( َطاء‬and ẓà ‫) ظ ( َظاء‬

7. If the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الْ َكلِ َمة‬of ‫( َتفَعل‬tafa’’ul) or ‫( َتفَا ُعل‬tafā’ul) is 1 of the following 11 letters: [ tà ‫) ت ( تَاء‬,
thà ‫) ث ( ثَاء‬, dāl ‫( َدال‬ ‫) د‬, dhāl ‫) ذ ( ِذال‬, zà ‫) ز ( َزاء‬, sīn ‫) س ( ِسين‬, shīn ‫) ش ( ِشين‬, ṣād ‫) ص ( َصاد‬,
dād ‫) ض ( َضاد‬, ṭà ‫) ط ( َطاء‬, ẓà ‫] ) ظ ( َظاء‬, then it is permissible to replace the then the tà ‫) ت ( َتاء‬
of ‫( َتفَعل‬tafa’’ul) or ‫( َتفَا ُعل‬tafā’ul) with the letter of the fà kalimah ‫ ف َُاء الْ َك ِل َمة‬and make idghām ‫اِ ْدغَام‬, and
due to a sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬appearing in the beginning, add a hamzah waṣl ‫َه ْم َزة الْ َو ْصل‬

‫اِطَّه ٌر‬ ‫ْط َطه ٌر‬

‫ َتفَعل‬is
‫َط َطه ٌر‬ ‫َت َطه ٌر‬
1 fà kalimah of

← ← ← ‫ )ط‬in e.g. 1,
ṭà (

‫اِثَّاقُ ٌل‬ ‫ْث َثاقُ ٌل‬ ‫َث َثاقُ ٌل‬ ‫َت َثاقُ ٌل‬ fà kalimah of ‫عل‬ُ ‫ َتفَا‬is
2

← ← ← thà (‫ )ث‬in e.g. 2

79
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF ÌDGHĀM – ‫اِ ْدغَام‬

RULES OF ÌDGHĀM – ‫ا ْل ِأ ْدغَام‬

I1. When two ṣahīh ‫ َص ِحيح‬mutaḥarrik ‫ ُم َت َح ِّرك‬letters are the same or qarīb makhraj ‫ ًقرِيب الْ َمخْ َرج‬and
appear side by side, then the first is made sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬and then mudgham ‫ ُم ْدغَم‬into the second.

‫َذ َّب‬ ← ‫َذ ْب َب‬ ← ‫َذ َب َب‬ 2 ṣaḥīh mutaḥarrik letters that are same
or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side

I2. When two ṣahīh ‫ َص ِحيح‬mutaḥarrik ‫ ُم َت َح ِّرك‬letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj ‫ًقرِيب الْ َمخْ َرج‬
appearing side by side and preceded by sākin ‫سا ِكن‬, َ then the ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬of the second is
given to the first and idghām ‫ اِ ْدغَام‬is made.

‫َي ُذب‬ ← ‫َي ُذ ْب ُب‬ ← ‫َي ْذ ُب ُب‬

2 ṣaḥīh mutaḥarrik letters that are same
or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side
preceded by sākin

I3. When there is ijtimā’ sākinayn ‫السا ِك َن ْين‬

َّ ‫ اِ ْجتِ َماع‬of two ṣahīh ‫ َص ِحيح‬letters as in the case of jazm ‫ج ْزم‬,
َ
then the word can be read in 4 different ways.

1) fatḥah ‫فَت َْحة‬ e.g. ‫ َي ُذب ← لَ ْم َي ُذ َّب‬+ ‫لَ ْم‬ because it is the lightest ḥarakah ‫َح َركَة‬

2) kasrah ‫ك َْس َرة‬ e.g. ‫ َي ُذب ← لَ ْم َي ُذ ِّب‬+ ‫لَ ْم‬ when sākin ‫سا ِكن‬gets
َ a ḥarakah ‫ح َركَة‬,
َ it gets a kasrah ‫ك َْس َرة‬

3) dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬e.g. ‫ َي ُذب ← لَ ْم َي ُذب‬+ ‫لَ ْم‬ when it was the original ḥarakah ‫َح َركَة‬

4) sākin ‫َسا ِكن‬ ْ ُ‫ َي ُذب ← لَ ْم َي ْذب‬+ ‫لَ ْم‬

e.g. ‫ب‬ when the idghām ‫ اِ ْدغَام‬is opened up

80
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫اِ ْدغَام – ‪RULES OF ÌDGHĀM‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪81‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫) ال َّذب ( الْ ُم َضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫‪ - to defend‬ال َّذب (ن) – الْ ُم َضا َعف‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضا ِرع‬ ‫اضي‬‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن ُي َذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ُذ َّب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُي َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫َي ُذب‬ ‫ُذ َّب‬‫‪I1‬‬ ‫َذ َّب‬
‫‪I1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن ُي َذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُي َذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َي ُذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫‪I1‬‬‫َذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن َي َذب ْوا‬ ‫َل ْن َي ُذب ْوا‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُي َذبو َن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َي ُذبو َن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذب ْوا‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫َذب ْوا‬
‫‪I1‬‬
‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن تُ َذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذ َّب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫َت ُذب‬ ‫ُذ َّب ْت‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫َذ َّب ْت‬
‫‪I1‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ْن َت ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َت ُذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّب َتا‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫َذ َّب َتا‬
‫‪I1‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫َل ْن ُي ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َل ْن َي ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫ُي ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َي ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب َن‬ ‫َذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن تُ َذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذ َّب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫َت ُذب‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب َت‬ ‫َذ َب ْب َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن ُت َذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُت َذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َت ُذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ُت َما‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن َت َذب ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذب ْوا‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذبو َن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َت ُذبو َن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ُت ْم‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن َت َذ ِّبي‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذ ِّبي‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذ ِّب َ‬
‫ين‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َت ُذ ِّب َ‬
‫ين‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ِت‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫لَ ْن تُ َذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْن َت ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫تُ َذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َت ُذ َّب ِان‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ُت َما‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫َل ْن تُ ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َل ْن َت ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫تُ ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َت ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ُت َّن‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ْن ُا َذ َّب‬ ‫َل ْن َا ُذ َّب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُا َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َا ُذب‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب ُت‬ ‫َذ َب ْب ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2‬‬‫لَ ْن نُ َذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْن نَ ُذ َّب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫نُ َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫نَ ُذب‬ ‫ُذبِ ْب َنا‬ ‫َذ َب ْب َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I1. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters are the same or qarīb makhraj and appear side by side, then the first is made sākin and then‬‬
‫‪mudgham into the second‬‬
‫‪I2. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side and preceded by sākin, then the ḥarakah‬‬
‫‪of the second is given to the first and idghām is made.‬‬

‫‪82‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫ال َّذب (ن) – الْ ُم َضا َعف‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫ا ْل َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َي ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َي ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬‫لَ ْم ُي ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْذ ُب ْب‬
‫‪I3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُي َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َي ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ُي َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل َي ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ُي َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل َي ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُي َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ْم َي ُذبوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْذ َب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َي ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُذبوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت َذ ِّبي‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُذ ِّبي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َل ْم ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْذ َب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َل َت ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫لَ ْم ُت ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َل ْم َت ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َن ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ ُن َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لَ َن ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم نُ ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َن ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side and preceded by sākin, then the ḥarakah‬‬
‫‪of the second is given to the first and idghām is made.‬‬
‫‪I3. When there is ijtimā’ sākinayn of two ṣahīh letters as in the case of jazm, then the word can be read in 4 different ways.‬‬
‫‪1) fatḥah‬‬ ‫‪2) kasrah‬‬ ‫‪3) dammah‬‬ ‫‪4) sākin‬‬
‫لَ ْم َي ُذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذ ِّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْذ ُب ْب‬

‫‪83‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫ال َّذب (ن) – الْ ُم َضا َعف‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫لِ ُي َذ َّب ْن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫لِ َي ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي َذ َّب َّن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذ َّب َّن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْذ َب ْب‬
‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْذ ُب ْب‬
‫‪I3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُي َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َي ُذبوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْذ َب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ َي ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫لِ َي ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫ُذ َّب‬
‫‪I3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫ُذ َّبا‬
‫‪I2‬‬
‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذب ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ ِّبي‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ ِّبي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫لِ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْذ َب ْب َنا ّن‬ ‫ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫لِ ُت ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫اُ ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َن ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ ُن َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫لِ َن ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side and preceded by sākin, then the ḥarakah‬‬
‫‪of the second is given to the first and idghām is made.‬‬
‫‪I3. When there is ijtimā’ sākinayn of two ṣahīh letters as in the case of jazm, then the word can be read in 4 different ways.‬‬
‫‪1) fatḥah‬‬ ‫‪2) kasrah‬‬ ‫‪3) dammah‬‬ ‫‪4) sākin‬‬
‫لَ ْم َي ُذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذ ِّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْذ ُب ْب‬

‫‪84‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫ال َّذب (ن) – الْ ُم َضا َعف‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي َذ َّب ْن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫َلأ َي ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذ َّب َّن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذ َّب َّن‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫‪I3‬‬‫َلأ ُي ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫َلأ َي ْذ ُب ْب‬
‫‪I3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ُذبوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْذ َب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َلأ َي ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذبوا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذبوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ ِّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ ِّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ ِّبي‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ ِّبي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا ِّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت َذ َّبا‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َت ُذ َّبا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْذ َب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْذ ُب ْب َنا ِّن‬ ‫َلأ ُت ْذ َب ْب َن‬ ‫َلأ َت ْذ ُب ْب َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ ُا َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َا ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ُذ َّب ْن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ َذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ُذ َّب َّن‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ نُ ْذ َب ْب‬ ‫‪I3‬‬ ‫َلأ َن ْذ ُب ْب‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪I2. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side and preceded by sākin, then the ḥarakah‬‬
‫‪of the second is given to the first and idghām is made.‬‬
‫‪I3. When there is ijtimā’ sākinayn of two ṣahīh letters as in the case of jazm, then the word can be read in 4 different ways.‬‬
‫‪1) fatḥah‬‬ ‫‪2) kasrah‬‬ ‫‪3) dammah‬‬ ‫‪4) sākin‬‬
‫لَ ْم َي ُذ َّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذ ِّب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ُذب‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْذ ُب ْب‬

‫‪85‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫ال َّذب (ن) – الْ ُم َضا َعف‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫َذا َّب ٌ‬
‫ات‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫‪I1‬‬‫َذا َّب َت ِان‬ ‫‪I1‬‬ ‫َذا َّب ٌة‬ ‫‪I1‬‬‫َذابو َن‬ ‫‪I1‬‬‫َذا َّب ِان‬ ‫َذاب‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫َم ْذ ُبو َب ٌ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َم ْذ ُبو َب َت ِان‬ ‫َم ْذ ُبو َب ٌة‬ ‫َم ْذ ُبو ُبو َن‬ ‫َم ْذ ُبو َب ِان‬ ‫َم ْذ ُب ٌ‬
‫وب‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫ُذ َب ٌب‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّب َي ٌ‬

‫ات‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ُذ َّب َي ِان‬ ‫‪ID‬‬ ‫ُذ َّبى‬ ‫‪I1‬‬ ‫اَ َذاب‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫اَ َذبو َن‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫اَ َذ َّب ِان‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫اَ َذب‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َم َذاب‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫َم َذ َّب ِان‬ ‫َم َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َم َذاب‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ِم َذ َّب ِان‬ ‫ِم َذب‬
‫‪I2‬‬

‫َم َذاب‬
‫‪I1‬‬ ‫‪I2‬‬ ‫ِم َذ َّب َت ِان‬ ‫ِم َذ َّب ٌة‬
‫‪I2‬‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َذابِ ُ‬
‫يب‬ ‫ِم ْذ َبا َب ِان‬ ‫ِم ْذ َب ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫‪I1. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters are the same or qarīb makhraj and appear side by side, then the first is made sākin and then‬‬
‫‪mudgham into the second‬‬
‫‪I2. When two ṣahīh mutaḥarrik letters that are the same or qarīb makhraj appearing side by side and preceded by sākin, then the ḥarakah‬‬
‫‪of the second is given to the first and idghām is made.‬‬

‫‪86‬‬
‫ال َّذب‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ ُم َ‬
‫ضا َعف – ‪EXAMPLE OF MUDĀ’AF‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪87‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF MAHMŪZ – ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز‬

RULES OF MAHMŪZ – ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز‬

H1. When a hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬within a word is sākin ‫سا ِكن‬, َ it is permissible to replace it with a ḥarf ul ‘illah
‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬that corresponds with the preceding ḥarakah ‫ح َركَة‬.
َ

‫س‬ ْ ‫ِذي ٌب‬ ‫ِذئْ ٌب‬

ٌ ‫َرا‬ ←
rule H1
‫س‬
ٌ ‫َرا‬ ←
rule H1
‫س‬
ٌ ‫ُبو‬ ←
rule H1
‫س‬
ٌ ‫ُب ْؤ‬
hamzah sākin within a word

H2. When two hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬join in a single word, and the second is sākin ‫سا ِكن‬, َ it becomes necessary
َّ ِ ْ
to change the second hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬to a ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف العلة‬corresponding to the ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬of
the first hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬.

‫ا َم َن‬ ←
rule H2
‫اَا ْ َم َن‬ ‫اُو ِم ُن‬ ←
rule H2
‫اُ ْؤ ِم ُن‬ ‫اِي َما ٌن‬ ←
rule H2
‫اِئْ َما ٌن‬

Two hamzahs joining with the

second one sākin

H3. When a hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬with a ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬is preceded with a sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬letter, it is permissible to
give the ḥarakah ‫ َح َركَة‬to the preceding letter and drop the hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬. This rule is seen in
different qirā’ah ‫قِ َرائَة‬.

‫َي َس ُل‬ ←
rule H3
‫َي ْس َئ ُل‬ hamza with a ḥarakah preceded by a ḥarf sākin

88
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ RULES OF MAHMŪZ – ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز‬
H4. If a hamza maftūḥah ‫وحة‬ َ ‫ َه ْم َزة َم ْف ُت‬is preceded by a letter that is maksūr ‫ َم ْك ُسور‬or madmūm ‫ َمضْ ُموم‬, the
hamza ‫ َه ْم َزة‬may be changed to a ḥarf ul ‘illah ‫ َح ْرف الْ ِعلَّة‬corresponding to the preceding ḥarakah
َ Note that the ḥarakah ‫( َح َركَة‬fatḥah ‫ )فَت َْحة‬remains on the changed letter.
‫ح َركَة‬.

‫ُس َوا ٌل‬ ←

rule H4
‫ُس َؤا ٌل‬ ‫ِم َي ٌر‬ ←
rule H4
‫ِم َئ ٌر‬ ‫ِف َي ٌة‬ ←
rule H4
‫ِف َئ ٌة‬

hamzahs maftuḥah preceded

by maksūr or madmūm letter

Notes

89
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫) الس َؤا ُل َو الْ َم ْس َئلَ ُة ( الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫‪ – to ask‬الس َؤا ُل (ف) – َم ْه ُموز الْ َع ْين‬

‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْن ُصوب‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ َم ِ‬
‫اضي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْساَ َل‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْساَ َل‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ُي ْساَ ُل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َي ْساَ ُل‬ ‫ُس ِؤ َل‬ ‫َساَ َل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ُي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْساَ َلأ‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫أن‬‫ُي ْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫أن‬‫َي ْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫ُس ِؤ َلأ‬ ‫َساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬‫لَ ْن ُي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْساَلُ ْوا‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫ُي ْساَلُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َي ْساَلُ ْو َن‬ ‫ُس ِؤلُ ْوا‬ ‫َساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَ َل‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَ َل‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت ُْساَ ُل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت َْساَ ُل‬ ‫ُس ِؤلَ ْت‬ ‫َساَلَ ْت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَ َلأ‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫أن‬ ‫ت ُْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫أن‬ ‫ت َْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫ُس ِؤلَ َتا‬ ‫َساَلَ َتا‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬‫لَ ْن ُي ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫لَ ْن َي ْساَلْ َن‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ُي ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َي ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ َن‬ ‫َساَلْ َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَ َل‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَ َل‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت ُْساَ ُل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت َْساَ ُل‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ َت‬ ‫َساَلْ َت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَ َلأ‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫أن‬ ‫ت ُْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫أن‬ ‫ت َْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ُت َما‬ ‫َساَلْ ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَلُ ْوا‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫ت ُْساَلُ ْو َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت َْساَلُ ْو َن‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ُت ْم‬ ‫َساَلْ ُت ْم‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَلِ ْي‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫ين‬ ‫ت ُْساَلِ َ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ين‬ ‫ت َْساَلِ َ‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ِت‬ ‫َساَلْ ِت‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَ َلأ‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫أن‬ ‫ت ُْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫أن‬ ‫ت َْساَ َل ِ‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ُت َما‬ ‫َساَلْ ُت َما‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬‫لَ ْن ت ُْساَلْ َن‬ ‫لَ ْن ت َْساَلْ َن‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت ُْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ت َْساَلْ َن‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ُت َّن‬ ‫َساَلْ ُت َّن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن اُ ْساَ َل‬ ‫لَ ْن اَ ْساَ َل‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اُ ْساَ ُل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اَ ْساَ ُل‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ ُت‬ ‫َساَلْ ُت‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْن ن ُْساَ َل‬ ‫لَ ْن ن َْساَ َل‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ن ُْساَ ُل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫ن َْساَ ُل‬ ‫ُس ِؤلْ َنا‬ ‫َساَلْ َنا‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3. When a hamza with a ḥarakah is preceded with a sākin letter, it is permissible to give the ḥarakah to the preceding letter and drop the‬‬
‫‪hamza‬‬

‫‪90‬‬
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫الس َؤا ُل (ف) – َم ْه ُموز الْ َع ْين‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬
‫الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْل ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫الْ ِف ْعل الْ ُم َضارِع الْ َم ْج َزوم‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ُي ْساَلْ َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل َي ْساَلْ َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ُي ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم َي ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ْم ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ْم ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل َت ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل َت ْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ْم ت ُْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ْم ت َْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ُت ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل َت ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت ُْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ت َْساَلْ َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اُ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم اَ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َك ِّلم‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل ُن ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َل َن ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ُن ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ َن ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ن ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لَ ْم ن َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3. When a hamza with a ḥarakah is preceded with a sākin letter, it is permissible to give the ḥarakah to the preceding letter and drop the‬‬
‫‪hamza‬‬

‫‪91‬‬
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫الس َؤا ُل (ف) – َم ْه ُموز الْ َع ْين‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر ا ْل ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ا ْلأ َ ْمر‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫‪H3‬‬‫لِ ُي ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬‫لِ َي ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَلَ َّن‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَلَ َّن‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَ ْل‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَ ْل‬
‫‪H3‬‬
‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َت ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُي ْساَ ْل َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َي ْساَ ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُت ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫اِ ْساَلْ َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ ُ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِأ َ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ ُن ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫لِ َن ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3. When a hamza with a ḥarakah is preceded with a sākin letter, it is permissible to give the ḥarakah to the preceding letter and drop the‬‬
‫‪hamza‬‬

‫‪92‬‬
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫الس َؤا ُل (ف) – َم ْه ُموز الْ َع ْين‬

‫ون الْخَ ِفيفَة‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي الْ ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ون الثَّ ِقي َلة‬
‫ال َّن ْهي ا ْل ُم َؤكَّد بِالن ِ‬ ‫ال َّن ْهي‬
‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫الْ َم ْج ُهول‬ ‫الْ َم ْع ُروف‬ ‫ِصيغَة‬
‫َلأ ُي ْساَلَ ْن‬
‫‪H3‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَلْ َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَلْ َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ُي ْساَ ْل َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ َي ْساَ ْل َن‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث غَائِب‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلُ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلُ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلُ ْوا‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َذكَّر َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلِ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلِ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلِ ْي‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ َلأ‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ َلأ‬ ‫َت ْث ِن َية ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَ ْل َنا ِّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت ُْساَلْ َن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ت َْساَلْ َن‬ ‫َج ْمع ُم َؤنَّث َح ِ‬
‫اضر‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْساَلَ ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْساَلَ َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اُ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ اَ ْساَ ْل‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن ُْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن َْساَ َل ْن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن ُْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن َْساَ َل َّن‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن ُْساَ ْل‬ ‫‪H3‬‬ ‫َلأ ن َْساَ ْل‬ ‫َج ْمع َم َت َكلِّم‬

‫‪H3. When a hamza with a ḥarakah is preceded with a sākin letter, it is permissible to give the ḥarakah to the preceding letter and drop the‬‬
‫‪hamza‬‬

‫‪93‬‬
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫الس َؤا ُل (ف) – َم ْه ُموز الْ َع ْين‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫َسائِل ٌ‬
‫َات‬ ‫َسائِ َل َت ِان‬ ‫َسائِ َل ٌة‬ ‫َسائِلُو َن‬ ‫َسائِل ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َسائِ ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلفَا ِعل‬
‫َم ْس ُئو َل ٌ‬
‫أت‬ ‫َم ْس ُئولَ َت ِان‬ ‫َم ْس ُئولَ ٌة‬ ‫َم ْس ُئولُو َن‬ ‫َم ْس ُئو َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫َم ْس ُئو ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َو ِاحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َج ِمع َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية َم َذكَّر‬ ‫َو ِاحد َم َذكَّر‬

‫ُس َئ ٌل‬ ‫ُس ْئ َل َي ٌ‬

‫ات‬ ‫ُس ْئ َل َي ِان‬ ‫ُس ْئ َلى‬ ‫اَ َسائِ ُل‬ ‫اَ ْس َئلُو َن‬ ‫اَ ْس َئل ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫اَ ْس َئ ُل‬ ‫اِ ْسم التَّ ْف ِضيل‬

‫َج ِمع‬ ‫َت ْثنِ َّية‬ ‫َو ِاحد‬

‫َم َسائِ ُل‬ ‫َم ْس َئل ِ‬

‫َان‬ ‫َم ْس َئ ٌل‬ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
‫َم َسائِ ُل‬ ‫ِم ْس َئل ِ‬
‫َان‬ ‫َم َسائِ ُل‬
‫َم َسائِ ُل‬ ‫ِم ْس َئ َل َت ِان‬ ‫َم َسائِ ُل‬ ‫اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬
‫َم َسائِي ُل‬ ‫ِم ْس َئا َل ِ‬
‫أن‬ ‫َم َسائِي ُل‬

‫‪94‬‬
‫الس َؤا ُل‬ ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫الْ َم ْه ُموز – ‪EXAMPLE OF MAHMŪZ‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪95‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT – ‫َت ْعلِيلَات‬

MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT – ‫َت ْعلِيلَات ُم َت َف ِّر َقة‬

TO BE APPLIED ON TRANSFORMATION OF WORDS

T1. The àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬preceded by dammah ‫ َض َّمة‬will become wāw ‫) و ( َواو‬

‫ُخ ْو ِد َع‬ ←
rule T1
‫ُخا ِد َع‬ ←
majhūl ‫َم ْج ُهول‬
‫َخا َد َع‬
àlif ( ‫ ) ا‬preceded by dammah

T2. The àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬preceded by kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬will become yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬

‫َم َحارِي ُب‬ ← ‫َم َحارِا ُب‬ ←

jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫ِم ْح َرا ٌب‬
rule T2
‫ ) ا‬preceded by a kasrah
‫ِم ْف َتا ٌح‬
àlif (

‫َمفَاتِي ُح‬ ←
rule T2
‫َمفَاتِا ُح‬ ←
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬

T3. That ḥarf madd ‫ َح ْرف الْ َم ّد‬that falls on the third place in a word and is zāìd ‫ َزائِد‬and is after the àlif
‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬of ‘‫ ’ َف َعا ِع ُل‬will become hamzah ‫َه ْم َزة‬

‫ك ََرائِ ُم‬ ←
rule T3
‫ك ََرايِ ُم‬ ←
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫َك ِري َم ٌة‬
ḥarf madd zāìd in the
after the àlif ( ‫ ) ا‬of ‘‫’فَ َعا ِع ُل‬ third position in a word

96
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT – ‫َت ْعلِيلَات‬

T4. When an àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬of jam’ ‫ َج ْمع‬falls between two wāw ‫) و ( َواو‬or two yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬, then one of
them will be changed to hamzah ‫َه ْم َزة‬

‫اَ َوائِ ُل‬ ← ‫اَ َوا ِو ُل‬ ← ‫اَ َّو ُل‬

1
‫ ) ا‬of jam’ falling between
àlif (
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
two wāw ( ‫ ) و‬in e.g. 1
rule T4

‫َخ َيائِ ُر‬ ← ‫َخ َيايِ ُر‬ ← ‫َخ ْي ٌر‬

2
two yà ( ‫ ) ي‬in e.g. 2
rule T4 jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬

T5. When a wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬appears in the beginning of a word whether madmūmah ‫ َمضْ ُمو َمة‬or
maksūrah ‫ َم ْك ُسو َرة‬, it is permissible to replace it with a hamzah ‫َه ْم َزة‬

‫اُ ُجو ٌه‬ ← ‫ُو ُجو ٌه‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬madmūmah appearing

‫اُقِّ َت ْت‬ ← ‫ُوقِّ َت ْت‬ at the beginning of the word

‫اح‬ٌ َ‫اِش‬ ← ‫اح‬ٌ َ‫ِوش‬ wāw ( ‫ ) و‬maksūrah appearing at

the beginning of the word

Note: wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬maftūḥah ‫وحة‬

َ ‫ َم ْف ُت‬has only been changed to hamzah ‫ َه ْم َزة‬in two places:

‫اَ َح ٌد‬ ← ‫َو َح ٌد‬

‫اَنَا ٌة‬ ← ‫َونَا ٌة‬

97
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT – ‫َت ْعلِيلَات‬
T6. If two wāw mutaḥarrikah ‫ َواو ُم َت َح ِّركَة‬appear in the beginning of a word, it is wājib ‫ َو ِاجب‬to change
the first one to a hamzah ‫َه ْم َزة‬

‫اص ُل‬ِ ‫اَ َو‬ ← ‫اص ُل‬ِ ‫َو َو‬ ←

jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫اص ٌل‬ِ ‫َو‬ 2 wāw ( ‫ ) و‬mutaḥarrikah appearing
‫اَ َو ِاع ُد‬ ← ‫َو َو ِاع ُد‬ ←
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫َو ِاع ٌد‬ at the beginning of the word

T7. That wāw ‫) و ( َواو‬which is sākin ‫ َسا ِكن‬in mufrad ‫ ُمف َْرد‬and falls between a kasrah ‫ ك َْس َرة‬and an
àlif ‫ ) ا ( اَلِف‬in its jam’ ‫ َج ْمع‬is changed to a yà ‫) ي ( َياء‬

‫ا‬
ٌ ‫رِ َي‬
‫اض‬ ←
ٌ ‫رِ َو‬
‫اض‬ ←
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫ض‬ٌ ‫َر ْو‬ ‫ ) و‬sākin in mufrad
ٌ ‫ِح َي‬ ٌ ‫ِح َو‬
falling between a kasrah and an àlif ( ) wāw (

‫اض‬ ← ‫اض‬ ←
jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫ض‬
ٌ ‫َح ْو‬
ٌ ‫( ’فُ ُعو‬fu’ūl), both the wāw ‫ ) و ( َواو‬at
T8. In nāqiṣ ‫ نَاقِص‬wāwī ‫ َوا ِو ّي‬having its jam’ ‫ َج ْمع‬on the wazn ‫ َوزْن‬of ‘‫ل‬
the end of the word are changed to yà ‫ ) ي ( َياء‬and the preceding letter is made maksūr ‫َم ْك ُسور‬

‫ِدلِي‬ ← ‫ُدلِي‬ ← ‫ُدلُ ْي ٌي‬ ← ‫ُدلُ ْو ٌو‬ ←

jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
‫َدلْ ٌو‬
or according
actual jam’ ‫َج ْمع‬
to some scholars
nāqiṣ wāwī having its jam’ on the wazn of
‘‫’فُ ُعو ٌل‬

98
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫َت ْعلِيلَات – ‪MISCELLANEOUS TA’LĪLĀT‬‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪99‬‬
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM ACCORDING TO ITS ORIGIN – ‫اَ ْق َسام ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

There are three types of ism ‫اِ ْسم‬: jāmid ‫ج ِامد‬,
َ maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬, and mushtaq ‫ُمشْ َت ّق‬

JĀMID ‫الْ َجا ِمد‬

Jāmid1 ‫ َج ِامد‬is that ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬from which no ṣeeghah ‫ ِصيغَة‬is derived, nor is it derived from any ṣeeghah
ِ It has three types: thulāthī2 ‫ثُلثِ ّي‬, rubā’ī3 ‫ ُر َب ِاع ّي‬, and khumāsī4 ‫خُ َم ِاس ّي‬, and each of these three are
‫صيغَة‬.
composed of two types: mujarrad5 ‫ ُم َج َّرد‬and mazīd fīh6 ‫ َمزِيد ِفيه‬.

jāmid ‫الْ َج ِامد‬

thulāthī ‫الثلثِ ّي‬
ِ ‫الر َب‬
rubā’ī ‫اع ّي‬
khumāsī ‫اس ّي‬ ِ ‫الْخُ َم‬

thulāthī ‫الثلثِ ّي‬ rubā’ī ‫الر َب ِاع ّي‬ khumāsī ‫الْخُ َم ِاس ّي‬
mujarrad ‫الْ ُم َج َّرد‬ mujarrad ‫الْ ُم َج َّرد‬ mujarrad ‫الْ ُم َج َّرد‬
and and and
mazīd fīh ‫الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬ mazīd fīh ‫الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬ mazīd fīh ‫الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬

1) thulāthī 2) thulāthī 3) rubā’ī 4) rubā’ī 5) khumāsī 6) khumāsī

mujarrad mazīd fīh mujarrad mazīd fīh mujarrad mazīd fīh
‫الثلثِ ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬ ‫الثلثِ ّي الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬ ‫الر َب ِاع ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬ ‫الر َب ِاع ّي الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬ ‫الْخُ َم ِاس ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬ ‫الْخُ َم ِاس ّي الْ َم ِزيد فِيه‬

1 ‫ َي ْج ُم ُد‬/‫ َج َم َد‬meaning to be hard/solid – as opposed to liquid

Derived from
2 Words with 3 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫َصلِ َّية‬ ْ ‫ُح ُروف ا‬
3 Words with 4 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫حروف اَصلِية‬
َّ ْ ُُ
4 Words with 5 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫حروف اَصلِية‬
َّ ْ ُُ
5 Derived from ‫يجرد‬/‫ جرد‬meaning to peel, to strip… These words have been stripped of any extra letters
ُ ِّ َ ُ َ َّ َ
6 Words having ḥurūf zāìdah ‫ حروف زائِدَة‬in addition to the ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫حروف اَصلِية‬
َ ُُ َّ ْ ُُ
100
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

1) THULĀTHĪ MUJARRAD ‫الثلثِ ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬

Thulāthī mujarrad ‫ ثُل ِث ّي ُم َج َّرد‬is that ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 3 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with nothing else added.
There are 10 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this:

1) ‫َف ْع ٌل‬ like ‫س‬ٌ ‫َف ْل‬ 6) ‫َف َع ٌل‬ like ‫س‬ٌ ‫َف َر‬
money a horse

2) ‫ِف ْع ٌل‬ like ‫ِح ْب ٌر‬

a sage
7) ‫ِف َع ٌل‬ like ‫ِع َن ٌب‬
a grape

3) ‫فُ ْع ٌل‬ like ‫قُ ْف ٌل‬ 8) ‫فُ َع ٌل‬ like ‫ُص َر ٌد‬
a lock a type of bird

4) ‫َف ِع ٌل‬ like ٌ ‫َك ِت‬

‫ف‬
a shoulder
9) ‫َف ُع ٌل‬ like ‫َع ُض ٌد‬
a upper arm

5) ‫ِف ِع ٌل‬ like ‫اِبِ ٌل‬

a camel
10) ‫فُ ُع ٌل‬ like ‫ُع ُن ٌق‬
a neck

2) THULĀTHĪ MAZĪD FĪH ‫الثلثِ ّي الْ َمزِيد فِيه‬

Thulāthī mazīd fīh ‫ ثُلثِ ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬is an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 3 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with ḥurūf zāìdah
‫ح ُروف َزائِدَة‬.
ُ There are countless àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this.

e.g. ‫ِف ِّعي ٌل‬ like ٌ ‫بِ ِّط‬

‫يخ‬
a watermelon

‫َفا ُعو ٌل‬ like ‫وس‬

ٌ ‫اس‬
ُ ‫َج‬
a spy

3) RUBĀ’Ī MUJARRAD ‫الر َبا ِع ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬

Rubā’ī mujarrad ‫ ُر َب ِاع ّي ُم َج َّرد‬is an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 4 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with no ḥurūf zāìdah
‫ح ُروف َزائِدَة‬.
ُ There are 5 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this:

1) ‫َف ْع َل ٌل‬ like ‫َج ْع َف ٌر‬

ja’far (a name)
4) ‫فُ ْعلُ ٌل‬ like ‫ُب ْرثُ ٌن‬
claws

2) ‫ِف ْع َل ٌل‬ like ‫ِد ْر َه ٌم‬

a currency
5) ‫ِف َع ْل ٌل‬ like ‫ِق َم ْط ٌر‬
a box (chest)

3) ‫ِف ْعلِ ٌل‬ like ‫ِز ْبر ٌِج‬

beauty

101
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

4) RUBĀ’Ī MAZĪD FĪH ‫الر َبا ِع ّي الْ َمزِيد فِيه‬

Rubā’ī mazīd fīh ‫ ُر َب ِاع ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬is an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 4 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with ḥurūf zāìdah ‫ح ُروف َزائِدَة‬.
ُ
There are 2 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this.

1) ‫َم ْف َعلُو ٌل‬ like ‫َم ْن َج ُنو ٌق‬ 2) ‫َف ْع َللُو ٌت‬ like ٌ ‫َع ْن َك ُب‬
‫وت‬
a catapult a spider

ِ ‫الْخُ َم‬
5) KHUMĀS’Ī MUJARRAD ‫اس ّي الْ ُم َج َّرد‬
Khumās’ī mujarrad ‫ خُ َم ِاس ّي ُم َج َّرد‬is an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 5 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with no ḥurūf zāìdah
‫ح ُروف َزائِدَة‬.
ُ There are 4 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this:

1) ‫َس َف ْر َج ٌل‬ 2) ‫قُ َذ ْع ِم ٌل‬ 3) ‫ِش‬

ٌ ‫َج ْح َمر‬ 4) ‫قِ ْر َط ْع ٌب‬
quince fruit a strong camel an old lady a small amount
of something

6) KHUMĀS’Ī MAZĪD FĪH ‫اس ّي الْ َمزِيد فِيه‬

ِ ‫الْخُ َم‬
Khumās’ī mazīd fīh ‫ خُ َم ِاس ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬is an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬that has 4 ḥurūf aṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬with ḥurūf zāìdah
‫ح ُروف َزائِدَة‬.
ُ There are 5 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬for this.

1) ٌ ُ‫َعضْ َرف‬
‫وط‬
a don’t know
2) ‫َق َب ْع َثرى‬
a mountain camel
3)
ٌ ‫قِ ْر َط ُب‬
‫وس‬
a great calamity
4) ‫ُخ َز ْعبِي ٌل‬
something fake
5) ‫ِيس‬
ٌ ‫َخ ْن َدر‬
a type of drink

NOTE:
In the Arabic language, an ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬may not have more than 4 ḥurūf zāìdah ‫ ُح ُروف َزائِدَة‬or consist of
more than a total of 7 ḥurūf ‫ح ُروف‬.
ُ
e.g. thulāthī mazīd fīh rubā’ī mazīd fīh khumās’ī mazīd fīh
‫ثُلثِ ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬ ‫ُر َب ِاع ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬ ‫خُ َم ِاس ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬

‫ِح َم ٌر‬ ‫َق ف ََج ٌر‬ ‫َعضْ َرفُ ٌط‬

‫ْق َو ٌل‬ ‫د َْحر ٌِج‬ ‫س‬ ٌ ‫َم ْق َن ِط‬
‫ْن ِص ٌر‬ ‫َع ُب ث ََر‬
‫ْن َص ٌر‬
Note: ḥurūf zāìdah ‫ال َّزائِدَة‬ ‫ الْ ُح ُروف‬are outlined

102
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

MAṢDAR ‫الْ َم ْصدَر‬

Maṣdar1 ‫ الْ َم ْصدَر‬is that ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬from which the fi’l ‫ فِ ْعل‬and àsmā` mushtaqqah ‫ ا ْلأ َ ْس َماء ا ْل ُمشْ َتقَّة‬originate. It is
also called the infinitive form of a verb – e.g. (to do – doing). There are about 50 àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬from
thulāthī mujarrad ‫ثُلثِ ّي ُم َج َّرد‬, they will be seen in volume III.

NOTES:
1) Those maṣādir ‫ َم َصا ِدر‬that represent a trade, skill, or an occupation commonly fall under the
àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬of ‘‫( ’ َف َعالَ ٌة‬fa’ālah) or ‘‫( ’ ِف َعالَ ٌة‬fi’ālah)

e.g. ‫ِف َعالَ ٌة‬ like ‫ِد َبا َغ ٌة‬

process of tanning hide
‫ِح َجا َم ٌة‬
art of cupping
‫ِح َيا َك ٌة‬
to spin thread
‫ِخ َيا َط ٌة‬
to sew
‫ِك َتا َب ٌة‬
skill of writing

2) The maṣdar mīmī ‫ َم ْصدَر ِمي ِم ّي‬of all àbwāb ‫ اَ ْب َواب‬of thulāthī mujarrad ‫ ثُلثِ ّي ُم َج َّرد‬fall under the àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬of
‘‫( ’ َم ْف َع ٌل‬maf’al) or ‘‫( ’ َم ْف ِع ٌل‬maf’il). Occasionally, a tà ‫) ة ( تَاء‬ is added

e.g. ‫َم ْف َع ٌل‬ like ‫َم ْق َد ٌم‬

to approach
‫َم ْف َع َل ٌة‬ like ‫َم ْس َئ َل ٌة‬
to ask a question

‫َم ْف ِع ٌل‬ like ‫َمضْ ر ٌِب‬

to hit
‫َم ْف ِع َل ٌة‬ like ‫َم ْح ِم َد ٌة‬
to praise

3) The wazn ‫ َوزْن‬of ‘‫( ’ َف ْع َل ٌة‬fa’lah) is used to show the number of times an action or event has taken
place. This is called marrah ‫( َم َّرة‬a single action)

e.g. ‫َف ْع َل ٌة‬ like ‫َض ْر َب ٌة‬ ‫َض َر َب ُه َض ْر َب ًة‬ ِ‫َض َر َب ُه َض ْر َب َت ْين‬ ٍ ‫َض َر َب ُه َث َل َث َض ْر َب‬
‫ات‬
single hit he hit him once he hit him twice he hit him three times

4) The wazn ‫ َوزْن‬of ‘‫( ’ ِف ْع َل ٌة‬fi’lah) is used to show the manner or a condition in which an action or
event has taken place. This is called naw’iyyah ‫( نَ ْو ِع َّية‬type)

e.g. ‫ِف ْع َل ٌة‬ like ‫ِض ْر َب ٌة‬

manner of hitting
‫َض َر َب ُه ِض ْر َب َة الظَّالِ ِم‬
he hit him like a tyrant hits

It may be said that ‘‫( ’ َف ْع َل ٌة‬fa’lah) is for quantity and ‘‫( ’ ِف ْع َل ٌة‬fi’lah) is for quality.

1 Derived from ‫صدُو ًرا‬/

ُ ‫ َي ْص ُد ُر‬/‫ َص َد َر‬, for something to begin – and maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬means “source” because it is a thing from
where something originates. “Chest” in Arabic is ‫صدْر‬
َ because it leads the body.
103
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

5) The àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬of maṣādir ‫ َم َصا ِدر‬from thulāthī mazīd fīh ‫ ثُلثِ ّي َمزِيد فِيه‬and rubā’ī ‫ ُر َب ِاع ّي‬are fixed such as
‘‫( ’اِفْ َعال‬ìf’āl), ‘‫( ’اِفْتِ َعال‬ìfti’āl), etc… however, there may be exceptions.

ٌ ‫( ’ َت ْف ِعي‬taf’īl) may appears as follows:

The maṣādir ‫ َم َصا ِدر‬of ‘‫ل‬

‫َت ْف ِع َل ٌة‬ like ‫ت َْج ِر َب ٌة‬

to experiment / to test
‫تِ ْف َعا ٌل‬ like ‫تِ ْب َيا ٌن‬
to hit

‫ِف َعا ٌل‬ like ٌ ‫ِك َذ‬

‫اب‬
to deny
‫ِف َّعا ٌل‬ like ٌ ‫ِك َّذ‬
‫اب‬
to deny

‫َت ْف َعا ٌل‬ like ‫َت ْك َرا ٌر‬ ‫َف َعا ٌل‬ like ٌ‫َسلَام‬
to repeat to greet

ٌ ‫( ’ ِف ْعلَا‬fi’lāl) like:
The maṣdar ‫ َم ْصدَر‬of ٌ‘‫( ’ َف ْع َل َلة‬fa’lalah) may fall under the wazn ‫ َوزْن‬of ‘‫ل‬

e.g. ‫ِف ْع َلا ٌل‬ like ‫ِزلْ َزا ٌل‬

for the earth to quake
‫ َزلْ َزلَ ًة َو ِزلْ َزا ًلأ‬/ ‫ ُي َزلْ ِز ُل‬/ ‫َزلْ َز َل‬

104
 ‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ CLASSIFICATION OF THE ÌSM - ‫ا ْل ِأ ْسم‬

MUSHTAQ ‫الْ ُمشْ َتق‬

Mushtaq ‫ ُمشْ َتق‬is that ism ‫ اِ ْسم‬which is formed from the ḥurūf àṣliyah ‫ ُح ُروف ا َْصلِ َّية‬of a verb. They are as
follows:

o ِ ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلف‬

ism fā’il ‫َاعل‬
o ism maf’ūl ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬
o ism tafdīl ‫ْضيل‬ ِ ‫اِ ْسم التَّف‬
o ism ẓarf ‫اِ ْسم الظ ْرف‬
َّ
o ism àālah ‫اِ ْسم ا ْلألَة‬
o ism ṣiffah ‫الص َفة‬ِّ ‫اِ ْسم‬

ISM FĀ’IL ‫اِ ْسم الْفَا ِعل‬

ِ ‫ اِ ْسم الْف‬represents the one carrying out an action.
Ism fā’il ‫َاعل‬

ISM MAF’ŪL ‫اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬

Ism maf’ūl ‫ اِ ْسم الْ َم ْف ُعول‬represents the one upon whom an action is taking place.

ِ ‫اِ ْسم ال َّت ْف‬

ISM TAFDĪL ‫ضيل‬
ِ ‫ اِ ْسم التَّف‬is used to show the highest degree or a comparatively higher degree of the
Ism tafdīl ‫ْضيل‬
attribute mentioned in the verb.

ISM ẒARF ‫ا ِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬

Ism ẓarf ‫ اِ ْسم الظَّ ْرف‬is used to denote the place or time of the occurrence of a verb.

ISM ÀĀLAH ‫ا ِ ْسم ا ْلألَه‬

Ism àālah ‫ اِ ْسم ا ْلألَه‬is used to denote the tool or means used in the performance of a verb.

The àwzān ‫ ا َْو َزان‬of all these àsmā` mushtaqqah ‫ ا ْلأ َ ْس َماء الْ ُمشْ َتقَّة‬have been studied in volume I.

ِّ ‫اِ ْسم‬
ISM ṢIFAH ‫الص َفة‬
ِّ ‫ اِ ْسم‬is used to denote an innate quality that is permanent and constant. Its àwzān ‫ا َْو َزان‬
Ism ṣifah ‫الص َفة‬
will be seen in volume III.

105
‫خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬ ‫‪APPENDIX A‬‬

‫‪106‬‬
‫‪A‬خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪107‬‬
‫‪A‬خير التصريف – الجزء الثاني‬

‫‪Notes‬‬

‫‪108‬‬